Eaton Cutler Hammer - DG1 Series Drives

PowerXL DG1 Series VFD
Application Manual
Effective March 2014
New Information
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability
The information, recommendations, descriptions, and safety notations in this document are
based on Eaton’s experience and judgment and may not cover all contingencies. If further
information is required, an Eaton sales office should be consulted. Sale of the product shown
in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling
policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser.
THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS, WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING
CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE
OBLIGATION OF EATON. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME
PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES.
In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including
negligence), strict liability, or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential
damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment,
plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of
existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting
from the use of the information, recommendations, and descriptions contained herein. The
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Cover Photo: Eaton PowerXL DG1 Series Drives
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
i
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Support Services
Support Services
The goal of Eaton is to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our
products. We are dedicated to providing fast, friendly, and accurate assistance. That is why
we offer you so many ways to get the support you need. Whether it is by phone, fax, or
email, you can access Eaton’s support information 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
Our wide range of services is listed below.
You should contact your local distributor for product pricing, availability, ordering, expediting,
and repairs.
Website
Use the Eaton Website to find product information. You can also find information on local
distributors or Eaton’s sales offices.
Website Address
www.eaton.com/drives
EatonCare Customer Support Center
Call the EatonCare Support Center if you need assistance with placing an order, stock
availability or proof of shipment, expediting an existing order, emergency shipments, product
price information, returns other than warranty returns, and information on local distributors or
sales offices.
Voice: 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273) (8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m. EST)
After-Hours Emergency: 800-543-7038 (6:00 p.m.–8:00 a.m. EST)
Drives Technical Resource Center
Voice: 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273) option 2, option 6
(8:00 a.m.–5:00 p.m. Central Time U.S. [UTC –6])
email: TRCDrives@Eaton.com
For Customers in Europe, Contact
Phone: +49 (0) 228 6 02-3640
Hotline: +49 (0) 180 5 223822
email: AfterSalesEGBonn@Eaton.com
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
ii
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Table of Contents
SAFETY
Before Commencing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazardous High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
x
x
x
xi
CHAPTER 1—POWERXL DG1 SERIES OVERVIEW
How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Clock Battery Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carton Labels (U.S. and Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Ratings and Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
CHAPTER 2—KEYPAD OVERVIEW
Keypad Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
9
9
CHAPTER 3—MENU OVERVIEW
Main Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
12
13
CHAPTER 4—STARTUP
Startup Wizard Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Macro Mini-Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
29
CHAPTER 5—STANDARD APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
31
32
CHAPTER 6—MULTI-PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump and Fan Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
46
47
51
53
CHAPTER 7—MULTI-PID APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-PID Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
75
76
77
CHAPTER 8—MULTI-PURPOSE APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Purpose Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
102
103
APPENDIX A—DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
APPENDIX B—FAULTS AND WARNING CODES
Fault Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
iii
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
List of Figures
Figure 1. RTC Battery Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Keypad and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. General View of LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Welcome Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Upgrade Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Auto Backup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Parent Node Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. Parameter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. Parameter Page from Favorite Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. Fault Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. Main Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. Main Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. M—Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. Pop-Up Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. Parameter Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. Down From Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Parameters Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. Edit Parameter Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. Parameter Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. Startup Wizard (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. Startup Wizard (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. Example of Two-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. Two-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31. Example of Three-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. Three-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. Example of the Function of the PFC Application
with Three Auxiliary Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 34. PID Controller Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. Acceleration and Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 37. Analog Input AI Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 38. AI1 Signal Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39. AI1 No Signal Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 40. AI1 Signal Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 41. Example of Joystick Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 42. Example of Sleep Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. With and Without Reference Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. Start Forward / Start Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45. Start, Stop and Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 46. Start Pulse / Stop Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 47. Activation of Fixed Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
1
2
3
6
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
47
48
49
49
50
75
130
131
133
133
134
134
135
135
136
137
137
138
139
www.eaton.com
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
List of Figures
Figure 48. Analog Output Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49. Analog Output Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 50. Analog Output Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 51. Supervision Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 52. External Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 53. Acceleration/Deceleration (S-shaped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 54. Example of Skip Frequency Area Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55. Ramp Speed Scaling between Skip Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56. Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57. Programmable V/Hz Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58. Motor Thermal Current IT Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59. Motor Temperature Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 60. Stall Characteristics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 61. Stall Time Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 62. Setting of Minimum Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63. Underload Time Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64. Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65. Setting up PID Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Coasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 67. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 68. AutoChange Interval and Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
144
144
148
149
153
154
154
157
157
162
163
164
164
165
166
167
172
177
177
180
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
v
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
List of Tables
Table 1. Common Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Type 1/IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3. Type 12/IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Type 1/IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Type 12/IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. Keypad Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. LED State Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. Keypad Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. Startup Wizard Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. Multi-Pump and Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. PID Mini-Wizard Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13. I/O Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 14. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 16. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 17. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 18. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 19. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 20. Digital Output—P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 21. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 22. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 23. Protections—P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 24. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 25. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 26. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 27. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 28. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 29. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 30. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 31. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 32. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 33. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 34. Multi-Pump and Fan Application Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 35. Drive Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 36. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 37. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 38. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 39. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 40. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 41. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 42. Digital Output—P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 43. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 44. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 45. Protections—P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 46. PID Controller 1—P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 47. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 48. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 49. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
1
4
4
5
5
7
9
10
13
28
29
29
31
32
34
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
45
45
45
51
52
53
55
55
56
57
59
60
61
62
63
65
68
68
68
www.eaton.com
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
List of Tables, continued
Table 50. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 51. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 52. Multi-Pump Control—P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 53. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 54. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 55. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 56. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 57. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 58. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 59. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 60. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 61. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 62. Multi-PID Application Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 63. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 64. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 65. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 66. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 67. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 68. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 69. Digital Output—P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 70. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 71. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 72. Protections—P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 73. PID Controller 1—P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 74. PID Controller 2—P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 75. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 76. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 77. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 78. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 79. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 80. Multi-Pump Control—P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 81. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 82. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 83. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 84. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 85. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 86. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 87. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 88. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 89. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 90. Multi-Purpose Application Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 91. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 92. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 93. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 94. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 95. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 96. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 97. Digital Output—P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 98. Logic Function—P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
69
69
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
76
77
80
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
93
94
94
95
95
95
95
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100
100
102
103
106
106
107
108
110
111
113
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
vii
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
List of Tables, continued
Table 99. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 100. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 101. Protections—P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 102. PID Controller 1—P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 103. PID Controller 2—P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 104. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 105. Torque Control—P13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 106. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 107. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 108. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 109. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 110. Multi-Pump Control—P18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 111. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 112. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 113. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 114. Modbus MS/TCP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 115. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 116. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 117. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 118. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 119. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 120. Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 121. History Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
114
115
117
119
122
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
126
127
127
127
128
128
129
129
129
191
191
www.eaton.com
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Safety
Warning!
Dangerous Electrical Voltage!
●
Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of
programs interrupted after a voltage dip or failure. This
should not cause dangerous operating states even for a
short time. If necessary, emergency-stop devices should
be implemented
●
Wherever faults in the automation system may cause
injury or material damage, external measures must be
implemented to ensure a safe operating state in the event
of a fault or malfunction (for example, by means of
separate limit switches, mechanical interlocks, and so on)
●
Depending on their degree of protection, adjustable
frequency drives may contain live bright metal parts,
moving or rotating components, or hot surfaces during and
immediately after operation
●
Removal of the required covers, improper installation, or
incorrect operation of motor or adjustable frequency drive
may cause the failure of the device and may lead to
serious injury or damage
●
The applicable national accident prevention and safety
regulations apply to all work carried out on live adjustable
frequency drives
Before Commencing the Installation
●
Disconnect the power supply of the device
●
Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally restarted
●
Verify isolation from the supply
●
Earth and short circuit the device
●
Cover or enclose any adjacent live components
●
Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with EN
50110-1/-2 (VDE 0105 Part 100) may work on this device/
system
●
Before installation and before touching the device ensure
that you are free of electrostatic charge
●
The functional earth (FE, PES) must be connected to the
protective earth (PE) or the potential equalization. The
system installer is responsible for implementing this
connection
●
Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so
that inductive or capacitive interference does not impair
the automation functions
●
The electrical installation must be carried out in
accordance with the relevant regulations (for example,
with regard to cable cross sections, fuses, PE)
●
Install automation devices and related operating elements
in such a way that they are well protected against
unintentional operation
●
●
Suitable safety hardware and software measures should
be implemented for the I/O interface so that an open
circuit on the signal side does not result in undefined
states in the automation devices
Transport, installation, commissioning, and maintenance
work must be carried out only by qualified personnel
(IEC 60364, HD 384 and national occupational safety
regulations)
●
Installations containing adjustable frequency drives must
be provided with additional monitoring and protective
devices in accordance with the applicable safety
regulations. Modifications to the adjustable frequency
drives using the operating software are permitted
●
All covers and doors must be kept closed during operation
●
To reduce hazards for people or equipment, the user must
include in the machine design measures that restrict the
consequences of a malfunction or failure of the drive
(increased motor speed or sudden standstill of motor).
These measures include:
●
Ensure a reliable electrical isolation of the extra-low
voltage of the 24V supply. Only use power supply units
complying with IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100 Part 410) or
HD384.4.41 S2
●
Deviations of the input voltage from the rated value must
not exceed the tolerance limits given in the specifications,
otherwise this may cause malfunction and dangerous
operation
●
Emergency stop devices complying with IEC/EN 60204-1
must be effective in all operating modes of the automation
devices. Unlatching the emergency-stop devices must not
cause a restart
●
Devices that are designed for mounting in housings or
control cabinets must only be operated and controlled after
they have been installed and with the housing closed.
Desktop or portable units must only be operated and
controlled in enclosed housings
●
Other independent devices for monitoring safety-related
variables (speed, travel, end positions, and so on)
●
Electrical or non-electrical system-wide measures
(electrical or mechanical interlocks)
●
Never touch live parts or cable connections of the
adjustable frequency drive after it has been
disconnected from the power supply. Due to the charge
in the capacitors, these parts may still be live after
disconnection. Fit appropriate warning signs
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
ix
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Definitions and Symbols
Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
This symbol indicates high voltage. It calls your attention
to items or operations that could be dangerous to you
and other persons operating this equipment. Read the
message and follow the instructions carefully. This
symbol is the “Safety Alert Symbol”. It occurs with either
of two signal words: CAUTION or WARNING, as
described below.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in minor to moderate injury, or serious
damage to the product. The situation described in the
CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results.
Important safety measures are described in CAUTION (as
well as WARNING).
This manual contains clearly marked cautions and warnings
which are intended for your personal safety and to avoid any
unintentional damage to the product or connected
appliances. Please read the information included in cautions
and warnings carefully.
WARNING
The relay outputs and other I/O-terminals may have a
dangerous control voltage present even when PowerXL
DG1 is disconnected from mains.
WARNING
Be sure not to plug the Ethernet/BACnet/IP cable to the
terminal under the keypad! This might harm your
personal computer.
WARNING
Be sure not to plug the Modbus TCP cable to the terminal
under the keypad! This might harm your personal
computer.
CAUTION
Hazardous High Voltage
Remove external control signal before resetting the fault to
prevent unintentional restart of the drive.
WARNING
Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are
connected to hazardous line voltages. When servicing
drives and electronic controllers, there may be exposed
components with housings or protrusions at or above
line potential. Extreme care should be taken to protect
against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only
one hand when checking components. Always work with
another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect
power before checking controllers or performing
maintenance. Be sure equipment is properly grounded. Wear
safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or
rotating machinery.
x
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Important Safety Information
Important Warnings
WARNING
Hazardous High Voltage
WARNING
The components of the power unit of PowerXL DG1 are
live when the AC drive is connected to mains potential.
Coming into contact with this voltage is extremely
dangerous and may cause death or severe injury.
WARNING
The motor terminals U, V, W and the brake resistor
terminals are live when PowerXL DG1 is connected to
mains, even if the motor is not running.
WARNING
After disconnecting the AC drive from the mains, wait
until the indicators on the keypad go out (if no keypad is
attached see the indicators on the cover). Wait 5 more
minutes before doing any work on the connections of
PowerXL DG1. Do not open the cover before this time
has expired. After expiration of this time, use a
measuring equipment to absolutely ensure that no
voltage is present. Always ensure absence of voltage
before starting any electrical work!
WARNING
The control I/O-terminals are isolated from the mains
potential. However, the relay outputs and other I/Oterminals may have a dangerous control voltage present
even when PowerXL DG1 is disconnected from mains.
WARNING
Before connecting the AC drive to mains, confirm that
the front and cable covers of PowerXL DG1 are closed.
WARNING
During a ramp stop (see the Application Manual), the
motor is still generating voltage to the drive. Therefore,
do not touch the components of the AC drive before the
motor has completely stopped. Wait until the indicators
on the keypad go out (if no keypad is attached see the
indicators on the cover). Wait additional 5 minutes
before starting any work on the drive.
PowerXL DG1 AC drive is meant for fixed installations
only.
WARNING
Do not perform any measurements when the AC drive is
connected to the mains.
WARNING
The ground leakage current of PowerXL DG1 AC drives
exceeds 3.5 mA AC. According to standard EN61800-5-1,
a reinforced protective ground connection must be
ensured.
WARNING
If the AC drive is used as a part of a machine, the machine
manufacturer is responsible for providing the machine
with a supply disconnecting device (EN 60204-1).
WARNING
Only spare parts delivered by Eaton can be used.
WARNING
At power-up, power brake or fault reset the motor will
start immediately if the start signal is active, unless the
pulse control for Start/Stop logic has been selected.
Furthermore, the I/O functionalistic (including start
inputs) may change if parameters, applications or
software are changed. Disconnect, therefore, the motor if
an unexpected start can cause danger.
WARNING
The motor starts automatically after automatic fault
reset if the auto restart function is activated. See the
Application Manual for more detailed information.
WARNING
Prior to measurements on the motor or the motor cable,
disconnect the motor cable from the AC drive.
WARNING
Do not touch the components on the circuit boards.
Static voltage discharge may damage the components.
WARNING
Check that the EMC level of the AC drive corresponds to
the requirements of your supply network.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
xi
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Additional Cautions
CAUTION
The PowerXL DG1 AC drive must always be grounded with
an grounding conductor connected to the grounding terminal
marked with. The ground leakage current of PowerXL DG1
exceeds 3.5 mA AC. According to EN61800-5-1, one or more
of the following conditions for the associated protective
circuit shall be satisfied:
a) The protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional
area of at least 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, through its
total run.
b) Where the protective conductor has a cross-sectional
area of less than 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, a second
protective conductor of at least the same cross-sectional
area shall be provided up to a point where the protective
conductor has a cross-sectional area not less than
10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al.
c) Automatic disconnection of the supply in case of loss of
continuity of the protective conductor. The crosssectional area of every protective grounding conductor
that does not form part of the supply cable or cable
enclosure shall, in any case, be not less than:
— 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection is provided or
— 4 mm2 if mechanical protection is not provided.
The ground fault protection inside the AC drive protects
only the drive itself against ground faults in the motor or
the motor cable. It is not intended for personal safety.
The ground fault protection inside the AC drive protects
only the drive itself against ground faults in the motor or
the motor cable. It is not intended for personal safety.
Due to the high capacitive currents present in the AC
drive, fault current protective switches may not function
properly.
Do not perform any voltage withstand tests on any part
of PowerXL DG1. There is a certain procedure according
to which the tests shall be performed. Ignoring this
procedure may result in damaged product.
xii
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
This chapter describes the purpose and contents of this
manual, the receiving inspection recommendations and the
DG1 Series Open Drive catalog numbering system.
Real Time Clock Battery Activation
How to Use this Manual
Simply remove the primary drive cover, locate the RTC
battery directly below the keypad, and connect the white
2-wire connector to the receptacle on the control board.
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with information
necessary to install, set and customize parameters, start up,
troubleshoot and maintain the Eaton DG1 Series adjustable
frequency drive (AFD). To provide for safe installation and
operation of the equipment, read the safety guidelines at the
beginning of this manual and follow the procedures outlined
in the following chapters before connecting power to the
DG1 Series AFD. Keep this operating manual handy and
distribute to all users, technicians and maintenance
personnel for reference.
To activate the real time clock (RTC) functionality in the
PowerXL DG1 Series AFD, the RTC battery (already mounted
in the drive) must be connected to the control board.
Figure 1. RTC Battery Connection
Receiving and Inspection
The DG1 Series AFD has met a stringent series of factory
quality requirements before shipment. It is possible that
packaging or equipment damage may have occurred during
shipment. After receiving your DG1 Series AFD, please
check for the following:
Check to make sure that the package includes the Instruction
Leaflet (IL040016EN), Quick Start Guide (MN040006EN),
User Manual CD (CD040002EN) and accessory packet. The
accessory packet includes:
●
Rubber grommets
●
Control cable grounding clamps
●
Additional grounding screw
Inspect the unit to ensure it was not damaged during
shipment.
Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate
corresponds with the catalog number on your order.
Table 1. Common Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
If shipping damage has occurred, please contact and file a
claim with the carrier involved immediately.
CT
Constant torque with high overload rating (150%)
VT
Variable torque with low overload rating (110%)
If the delivery does not correspond to your order, please
contact your Eaton Electrical representative.
IH
IL
High Overload (150%)
Note: Do not destroy the packing. The template printed
on the protective cardboard can be used for marking
the mounting points of the DG1 AFD on the wall or
in a cabinet.
AFD
Adjustable Frequency Drive
VFD
Variable Frequency Drive
Low Overload (110%)
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
1
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
Rating Label
Figure 2. Rating Label
Contains
SN, PN,
Type, Date
Contains
EAN Code
Contains
NAED Code
Date Code: 20131118
Carton Labels (U.S. and Europe)
Same as rating label shown above.
2
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
Catalog Number System
Figure 3. Catalog Numbering System
Series
Power Part
Options
D G1 – 3 4 4D8 F B – C 21 C
Basic Naming
D = Drive
Series
G1 = General purpose
Coating of Boards
C = Coated
Phase Reference
3 = 3~ INPUT/3~ OUTPUT
Internal Brake Chopper
N = No brake chopper
B = Brake chopper
Input/Output Voltage Rating
2 = 230V (208–240V, –15%, +10%)
4 = 400V (380–500V, –15%, +10%)
5 = 575V (525–600V, –15%, +10%)
3D7 =
4D8 =
6D6 =
7D8 =
011 =
012 =
017 =
025 =
031 =
048 =
061 =
075 =
088 =
114 =
143 =
170 =
211 =
261 =
208–240V
3.7A, 0.55 kW, 0.75 hp
4.8A, 0.75 kW, 1 hp
6.6A, 1.1 kW, 1.5 hp
7.8A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp
11A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp
12.5A, 3 kW, 5 hp (VT)
17.5A, 3.7 kW, 5 hp
25A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp
31A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp
48A, 11 kW, 15 hp
61A, 15 kW, 20 hp
75A, 18.5 kW, 25 hp
88A, 22 kW, 30 hp
114A, 30 kW, 40 hp
143A, 37 kW, 50 hp
170A, 45 kW, 60 hp
211A, 55 kW, 75 hp
261A, 75 kW, 100 hp
Internal EMC Filter
F = Internal EMC filter
Output Current Rating (CT)
380–500V
2D2 = 2.2A, 0.75 kW, 1 hp
3D3 = 3.3A, 1.1 kW, 1.5 hp
4D3 = 4.3A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp
5D6 = 5.6A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp
7D6 = 7.6A, 3 kW, 5 hp
9D0 = 9A, 4 kW, 7.5 hp (VT)
012 = 12A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp
016 = 16A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp
023 = 23A, 11 kW, 15 hp
031 = 31A, 15 kW, 20 hp
038 = 38A, 18 kW, 25 hp
046 = 46A, 22 kW, 30 hp
061 = 61A, 30 kW, 40 hp
072 = 72A, 37 kW, 50 hp
087 = 87A, 45 kW, 60 hp
105 = 105A, 55 kW, 75 hp
140 = 140A, 75 kW, 100 hp
170 = 170A, 90 kW, 125 hp
205 = 205A, 110 kW, 150 hp
261 = 261A, 132 kW, 200 hp
3D3 =
4D5 =
7D5 =
010 =
013 =
018 =
022 =
027 =
034 =
041 =
052 =
062 =
080 =
100 =
125 =
144 =
208 =
Enclosure (IP Rating)
21 = IP21/Type 1
54 = IP54/Type 12
Display Option
C = LCD (graphical)
525–600V
3.3A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp
4.5A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp
7.5A, 3.7 kW, 5 hp
10A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp
13.5A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp
18A, 11 kW, 15 hp
22A, 15 kW, 20 hp
27A, 18 kW, 25 hp
34A, 22 kW, 30 hp
41A, 30 kW, 40 hp
52A, 37 kW, 50 hp
62A, 45 kW, 60 hp
80A, 55 kW, 75 hp
100A, 75 kW, 100 hp
125A, 90 kW, 125 hp
144A, 110 kW, 150 hp
208A, 160 kW, 200 hp
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
3
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
Power Ratings and Product Selection
DG1 Series Drives—208–240 Volt
Table 2. Type 1/IP21
Frame Size
230V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (CT/IH)
230V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (VT/IL)
FR1
0.55
0.75
230V, 60 Hz
hp (CT/IH)
0.75
230V, 60 Hz
hp (VT/IL)
1
Current
A (CT/IH)
3.7
Current
A (VT/IL)
4.8
DG1-323D7FB-C21C
0.75
1.1
1
1.5
1.1
1.5
1.5
2
4.8
6.6
DG1-324D8FB-C21C
6.6
7.8
1.5
2.2
2
3
7.8
DG1-326D6FB-C21C
11
DG1-327D8FB-C21C
Catalog Number
2.2
3
3
—
11
12.5
DG1-32011FB-C21C
3
3.7
—
5
12.5
17.5
DG1-32012FB-C21C
3.7
5.5
5
7.5
17.5
25
DG1-32017FB-C21C
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
25
31
DG1-32025FB-C21C
FR3
7.5
11
10
15
31
48
DG1-32031FB-C21C
11
15
15
20
48
61
DG1-32048FB-C21C
FR4
15
18.5
20
25
61
75
DG1-32061FN-C21C
18.5
22
25
30
75
88
DG1-32075FN-C21C
FR2
FR5
FR6 1
22
30
30
40
88
114
DG1-32088FN-C21C
30
37
40
50
114
143
DG1-32114FN-C21C
37
45
50
60
143
170
DG1-32143FN-C21C
45
55
60
75
170
211
DG1-32170FN-C21C
55
75
75
100
211
261
DG1-32211FN-C21C
75
90
100
125
261
312
DG1-32261FN-C21C
230V, 60 Hz
hp (VT/IL)
1
Current
A (CT/IH)
3.7
Current
A (VT/IL)
4.8
DG1-323D7FB-C54C
Table 3. Type 12/IP54
Frame Size
230V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (CT/IH)
230V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (VT/IL)
FR1
0.55
0.75
230V, 60 Hz
hp (CT/IH)
0.75
0.75
1.1
1
1.5
4.8
6.6
DG1-324D8FB-C54C
1.1
1.5
1.5
2
6.6
7.8
DG1-326D6FB-C54C
1.5
2.2
2
3
7.8
11
DG1-327D8FB-C54C
2.2
3
3
—
11
12.5
DG1-32011FB-C54C
3
3.7
—
5
12.5
17.5
DG1-32012FB-C54C
3.7
5.5
5
7.5
17.5
25
DG1-32017FB-C54C
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
25
31
DG1-32025FB-C54C
FR3
7.5
11
10
15
31
48
DG1-32031FB-C54C
11
15
15
20
48
61
DG1-32048FB-C54C
FR4
15
18.5
20
25
61
75
DG1-32061FN-C54C
FR2
FR5
FR6 1
18.5
22
25
30
75
88
DG1-32075FN-C54C
22
30
30
40
88
114
DG1-32088FN-C54C
30
37
40
50
114
143
DG1-32114FN-C54C
37
45
50
60
143
170
DG1-32143FN-C54C
45
55
60
75
170
211
DG1-32170FN-C54C
55
75
75
100
211
261
DG1-32211FN-C54C
75
90
100
125
261
312
DG1-32261FN-C54C
Note
1 FR6 available in 2015.
4
Catalog Number
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview
DG1 Series Drives—380–500 Volt
Table 4. Type 1/IP21
Frame Size
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR5
FR6 1
400V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (CT/IH)
400V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (VT/IL)
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
460V, 60 Hz
hp (CT/IH)
1
1.5
2
3
5
—
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
460V, 60 Hz
hp (VT/IL)
1.5
2
3
5
—
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
Current
A (CT/IH)
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
9
12
16
23
31
38
46
61
72
87
105
140
170
205
261
Current
A (VT/IL)
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
9
12
16
23
31
38
46
61
72
87
105
140
170
205
261
310
460V, 60 Hz
hp (CT/IH)
1
1.5
2
3
5
—
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
460V, 60 Hz
hp (VT/IL)
1.5
2
3
5
—
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
Current
A (CT/IH)
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
9
12
16
23
31
38
46
61
72
87
105
140
170
205
261
Current
A (VT/IL)
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
9
12
16
23
31
38
46
61
72
87
105
140
170
205
261
310
Catalog Number
DG1-342D2FB-C21C
DG1-343D3FB-C21C
DG1-344D3FB-C21C
DG1-345D6FB-C21C
DG1-347D6FB-C21C
DG1-349D0FB-C21C
DG1-34012FB-C21C
DG1-34016FB-C21C
DG1-34023FB-C21C
DG1-34031FB-C21C
DG1-34038FB-C21C
DG1-34046FB-C21C
DG1-34061FN-C21C
DG1-34072FN-C21C
DG1-34087FN-C21C
DG1-34105FN-C21C
DG1-34140FN-C21C
DG1-34170FN-C21C
DG1-34205FN-C21C
DG1-34261FN-C21C
Table 5. Type 12/IP54
Frame Size
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR5
FR6 1
400V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (CT/IH)
400V, 50 Hz
kW Rating (VT/IL)
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
Catalog Number
DG1-342D2FB-C54C
DG1-343D3FB-C54C
DG1-344D3FB-C54C
DG1-345D6FB-C54C
DG1-347D6FB-C54C
DG1-349D0FB-C54C
DG1-34012FB-C54C
DG1-34016FB-C54C
DG1-34023FB-C54C
DG1-34031FB-C54C
DG1-34038FB-C54C
DG1-34046FB-C54C
DG1-34061FN-C54C
DG1-34072FN-C54C
DG1-34087FN-C54C
DG1-34105FN-C54C
DG1-34140FN-C54C
DG1-34170FN-C54C
DG1-34205FN-C54C
DG1-34261FN-C54C
Note
1 FR6 available in 2015.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
5
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
The keypad is the interface between the drive and the user.
It features an LCD display, 3 LED lights and 11 buttons. With
the control keypad, it is possible to control the speed of a
motor, to supervise the state of the equipment and to set the
frequency converter’s parameters. See Figure 4.
Figure 4. Keypad and Display
Programmable Soft Key 2
Programmable Soft Key 1
Increase Value
Scroll Menu Up
Change Control Place Between
Local and Remote
Move Cursor Right
Back/Reset Button
Start Button
Stop Button
Move Cursor Left
Enter Menu
Confirm Selection
6
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Decrease Value
Scroll Menu Down
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
Keypad Buttons
Buttons Description
Table 6. Keypad Buttons
Icon
Button
Description
Soft Key 1,
Soft Key 2
Soft Key 1, Soft Key 2:
The functions of these two buttons shall be the following:
Forward/Reverse, this shall change motor’s run direction.
Reset, this shall ask MCU to reset after some parameters are modified.
• Menu, this shall return to main menu.
• Details, this shall display the details of the fault.
• Bypass, this shall make drive go into bypass.
• Jog, this shall activate jog.
• Favorite, this shall add this parameter to the Favorite menu.
• Delete, this shall delete this parameter from the Favorite menu.
Back/Reset
Back/Reset:
This button has three integrated functions. The button operates as backward button
during normal mode.
In edit mode, it is used as cancel operate. It is also used to reset faults when faults occur.
• Backs up one step.
• Cancels Modify in edit mode.
• Resets the active faults (all the active faults shall be reset by pressing this button
more than 2s in any page).
Local/Remote
Local/Remote:
Switches between LOCAL and REMOTE control for start and speed reference. The control
locations corresponding to local and remote shall be selected within an application.
Up
Down
Up and Down Arrows:
• Move either up or down a menu list to select the desired menu item.
• Editing a parameter bit by bit, while the active digit is scrolled.
• Increase/decrease the reference value of the selected parameter.
• In parameter comparison mode, scroll through the parameters of which current
value is different from comparison parameter value.
• In parameter page when in read mode, move to the previous or next brother
parameter of this parameter.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
7
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
Table 6. Keypad Buttons, continued
Icon
8
Button
Description
Left
Left Arrow:
• Navigation button, movement to left when editing a parameter digit by digit.
• Backs up one step.
Right
Right Arrow:
• Enter parameter group mode.
• Enter parameter mode from group mode.
• Enter parameter whole edit mode when this parameter can be written.
• Enter parameter bit by bit edit mode from whole edit mode.
• Navigation button, movement to right when editing a parameter bit by bit.
OK
OK:
• To clear all the Fault History if pressed for more than 5s (including 5s) in any
page.
• This button is used in the parameter edit mode to save the parameter setting.
• To confirm the start-up list at the end of the Start-Up Wizard.
• To confirm the comparison item in parameters comparison mode.
The following is the same with Right key:
• Enter parameter whole edit mode when this parameter can be written.
• Enter parameter group mode.
• Enter parameter mode from group mode.
Stop
Stop:
This button operates as motor stop button for normal operation when the “Keypad” is
selected as the control source and keypad stop button is active, or stop button is always
enabled regardless of control source.
• Motor stop from the keypad.
Start
Start:
This button operates as motor start button for normal operation when the “Keypad” is
selected as the active control source.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
LED Lights
The lines definition is as below:
The first line is State line, shows:
Table 7. LED State Indicators
Indicator
Description
Run
Run:
Indicates that the VFD is running and controlling the load in
Drive or Bypass.
Blinks when a stop command has been given but the drive is
still ramping down.
Fault:
Turn on when there is one or more active drive fault(s).
Blinks when there is one or more active drive warning(s).
Fault
Local/Remote:
Local: If the local control place is selected, turn off the light.
Remote: If the remote control place is selected, turn on the
light.
Remote
LCD Display
The keypad LCD indicates the status of the motor and the
drive and any faults in motor or drive functions. On the LCD,
the user sees information about the current location in the
menu structure and the item displayed.
●
RUN / STP / NRD—If motor is running, the run state shall
display “RUN”, otherwise the state display “STP”. “RUN”
blinks when the stop command is sent but the drive is
decelerating. “NRD” is displayed if the drive is not ready or
does not have a signal
●
FWD / REV—If the motor running direction is clockwise,
display “FWD”, otherwise display “REV”
●
KEY / I/O / BPS / BUS—If it is in bypass currently, display
“BPS”; otherwise, if the current control source is I/O
terminal, display “I/O”. If it is keypad, then display “KEY”;
otherwise display “BUS”
●
PAR / MON / FLT / OPE / QSW / FAV / TPM—If the
current page is parameter menu, display “PAR”; If monitor
menu, then display “MON”; If fault menu, then display
“FLT”; If operation menu, then display “OPE”; If quick
start wizard, then display “QSW”; If optional card menu,
then display “BOA”; If favorite menu, then display “FAV”;
If main menu, then display “TPM”
The second line is Code line, shows the menu code.
The third line is Name line, shows the menu name or
parameters name.
Overview
The fourth line is Value line, shows the submenu name or
parameters value.
Five lines shall be displayed in the screen. General view is as
following in Figure 5.
The fifth line is Soft key line, the functions of Soft key 1 and
Soft key 2 are changeable, and the real time is in the middle.
Figure 5. General View of LCD
Direction Status
Drive Status
Menu Location
Welcome Page
LCD shall show the welcome page when power on. See
Figure 6.
Control Place
Figure 6. Welcome Page
Active
Selection
Soft Key 1
Function Label
Real Time Clock
(hh:mm)
Soft Key 2
Function Label
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
9
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
Upgrade Page
Soft Key Description
After welcome page, keypad will check whether there is
different keypad firmware version in MCU’s serial flash. If
yes, then ask user whether to upgrade the keypad.
There are two soft key buttons. They have different
definitions under different pages.
Figure 7. Upgrade Page
Keypad
Display Page
Default
Soft Key 1
Default
Soft Key 2
Main Menu Page
NULL or BYPASS
JOG
Group Node Page
REVERSE or FORWARD
MENU
Parameter Node Page
NULL or FAVORITE or RESET
MENU
Favorite Page
DELETE
MENU
Fault Page
DETAIL
MENU
Table 8. Soft Keys
1.
Auto Backup Page
If keypad is plugged into a new drive, then auto backup page
will be shown to notice the user whether to do the upload/
download.
In the main menu (root node), “JOG” shall be shown on
the right. If bypass is enabled, then “BYPASS” shall be
shown on the left. Otherwise, it will not be shown. See
Figure 9.
Figure 9. Main Menu
Figure 8. Auto Backup Page
STP
FWD
KEY
MON
Download from keypad
No Action
Upload to keypad
13:53
2.
For the parameter group (), the two soft keys
“REVERSE/FORWARD” and “MENU” shall be shown.
See Figure 10.
Figure 10. Parent Node Page
10
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 2—Keypad Overview
3.
For the parameter menu (), if this parameter hasn’t been
added into the favorite list, two soft keys “FAVORITE”
and “MENU” shall be shown. If it has been added into
the favorite list, only one soft key “MENU” is shown in
the right.
If a parameter has been edited and drive needs to reset
so that the new value can become effective, “RESET”
shall be shown, which means user can reset the drive
through this soft key. See Figure 11.
4.
If one parameter has been added to the favorite list, it
shall appear in the favorite menu. Then when you enter
into the favorite menu, two soft keys “DELETE” and
“MENU” shall be shown, and “DELETE” means you can
delete the selected parameter from favorite list. See
Figure 12.
Figure 12. Parameter Page from Favorite Menu
Figure 11. Parameter Page
5.
For the fault group, two soft keys “DETAIL” and
“MENU” shall be shown. See Figure 13. For more
information, see Page 15.
Figure 13. Fault Page
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
11
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Main Menu Page
The data on the keypad are arranged in menus and
sub-menus. The first menu level consists of M1, P1, F1, B1,
T1 and O1, and it is called the Main Menu.
Figure 14. Main Menu Page
Menu Navigation
This section provides basic instruction on navigating each
section in the menu structure.
Figure 15. Main Menu Navigation
12
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Menu Structure
Table 9. Keypad Menus
Item
Description
Monitor
M1—Output Frequency
Item
M24—Interval 3
Description
Parameters P1—Basic Parameters
M2—Freq Reference
M25—Interval 4
P2—Analog Input
M3—Motor Speed
M26—Interval 5
P3—Digital Input
Item
Description
Fault
F1—Active Fault
F2—History Fault
Optional Boards B1—SlotA
M4—Motor Current
M27—Timer 1
P4—Analog Output
M5—Motor Torque
M28—Timer 2
P5—Digital Output
Favorite
B2—SlotB
—
M6—Motor Power
M29—Timer 3
P6—Logic Function
Operate Mode
O1—Output Frequency
M7—Motor Voltage
M30—PID1 Set Point
P7—Drive Control
O2—Freq Reference
M8—DC-link Voltage
M31—PID1 Feedback
P8—Motor Control
O3—Motor Speed
M9—Unit Temperature
M32—PID1 Error Value
P9—Protections
O4—Motor Current
M10—Motor Temperature
M33—PID1 Output
P10—PID Controller1
05—Motor Torque
M11—Torque Reference
M34—PID1 Status
P11—PID Controller2
O6—Motor Power
M12—Analog Input 1
M35—PID2 Set Point
P12—Preset Speed
O7—Motor Voltage
M13—Analog Input 2
M36—PID2 Feedback
P13—Torque Control
O8—DC-Link Voltage
M14—Analog Output 1
M37—PID2 Error Value
P14—Brake
O9—Unit Temperature
M15—Analog Output 2
M38—PID2 Output
P15—Fire Mode
O10—Motor Temperature
M16—DI1, DI2, DI3
M39—PID2 Status
P16—Second Motor Para
O11—Keypad Torque Ref
M17—DI4, DI5, DI6
M40—Running Aux Drives
P17—Bypass
012—Keypad Reference
M18—DI7, DI8
M41—PT100 Temp
P18—Multi-Pump Ctrl
M19—DO1
M42—Last Active Fault
P19—Real Time Clock
M20—RO1, RO2, RO3
M43—RTC Battery Status
P20—Communication
M21—TC1, TC2, TC3
M44—Instance Motor Power
P21—System
M22—Interval 1
M45—Energy Savings
M23—Interval 2
M46—Multi-Monitoring
Startup Wizard
S—Startup Wizard
Note: Will vary depending on application selected.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
13
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
M—Monitor
In monitor page, user shall not be able to edit the parameters except multi-monitor parameter.
The navigation for monitor is as Figure 16.
Figure 16. M—Monitor
14
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
F—Fault
There are three fault pages. The first one is F1 active faults;
the second one is pop-up automatically when fault occurs;
the third one is F2 fault history.
After the DETAIL soft key is pressed, the detail information
about the fault shall be shown: fault code, type, current,
voltage, power, torque, DC voltage, unit temperature, run
status, direction, warnings, zero speed shall be shown in
sequence.
If there is no active fault/history fault, then “No fault” shall be
shown.
Active Fault
The navigation for active faults is as Figure 17.
Figure 17. Active Faults
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
15
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Pop-up Fault
The navigation for the pop-up active fault is as Figure 18.
Figure 18. Pop-Up Active Faults
The latest active fault page shall pop up when there is new
active faults, the pop-up fault page is the same as the active
fault page.
Pressing the back/reset key less than 2 seconds shall back to
the last page user is watching.
Pressing the back/reset key more than 2 seconds shall reset
all active faults when all the active fault condition is not
satisfied.
User shall be able to navigate all the active faults by up/down
key.
The page for active faults and pop-up faults are the same,
except one: the response to the “Back” key. In active faults
page, if the Back key is pressed, it returns to the last level
menu. In pop-up faults page, it returns to the last page.
16
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Fault History
The navigation for fault history is as Figure 19.
In any page, OK button is used to clear all the fault history by
pressing more than 5s without password.
Figure 19. Fault History
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
17
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
P—Parameter
In parameter page, the value of parameter and unit shall be
shown in the fourth line (0.00 Hz), align the text to the left.
The navigation for parameter is as Figure 20.
In parameter page, the parameter code shall be shown in the
second line (such as P1.1), align the text to the left.
If the parameter is read and write, then pressing the right key
shall make the parameter value flash, which means that the
value can be edited.
In parameter page, the parameter name shall be shown in
the third line (such as Min Frequency), align the text to the
left.
If the parameter is read only, then pressing the right key will
not have any effect, which means that the value can’t be
edited.
Figure 20. Parameter Menu Overview
There are several special pages:
1.
P21.1.3 Parameter Sets. See Figure 21.
User shall be able to load or store parameters. There are
default, set1 and set2 parameters that can be used. The
special points are:
●
During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which
means it is in process.
●
When it is finished, “OK” shall be shown.
●
Drive shall restart after default parameters are loaded.
18
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Figure 21. Parameter Sets
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
19
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
2.
P21.1.4 Up to keypad and P21.1.5 Down from keypad
During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which
means it is in process. When it is finished, “OK” shall be
shown.
Figure 22. Down From Keypad
20
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
3.
P21.1.6 Parameters Comparison
After the operation, the number of different parameter
will be shown. Then press the right key; the first
different parameter shall be shown.
The parameter name shall be shown in the second line,
and the value which is from keypad/default/set1/set2
shall be shown in the third line, the current value shall be
shown in the fourth line.
If the user wants to modify the current value, user shall
be able to enter the edit mode by right key.
User shall be able to browse all the different parameters
by up/down key.
During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which
means it is in process.
When it is finished, “OK” shall be shown. See
Figure 23.
Figure 23. Parameters Comparison
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
21
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
4.
P21.1.7 Password
Password protects the parameters’ security. Zero means
not used, otherwise in use. If password is in use, user
can still see the values of parameters, but needs to
check the password before editing. And user has to
check the old password before modifying it.
0000 shall mean that the password is not used, the
password is 0000 by default.
Enter the password setting page. If the password is
0000, then the “Not use” shall be shown. If the
password is not 0000, then the “in use” shall be shown.
If the password is in use, and user inputs the wrong
password, then the “failed” shall be shown.
After “failed” is shown 3 seconds, the page shall return
to the parameter read page.
The password range shall be 0001–9999, the setting of
password and checking of password are as Figure 4-21.
If the password is in use, and user inputs the right
password, then the value shall flash, which indicates that
it can be edited.
Figure 24. Password
Note: Please contact Eaton customer support if password
is forgotten.
22
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Value Edit
This topic shows the methods to edit value, and what will
happen to edit value when password is in use and parameter
lock is enabled.
We have three methods to edit value: edit by key press-hold,
edit bit by bit, edit click by click.
For details, please see Figure 25. For the editable parameter,
press “Right” key once to enter the read mode (just read the
value of this parameter), press “Right” key again to enter the
edit mode (user can modify the value of this parameter),
press “Right” key again to enter the bit-by-bit edit mode.
User shall use Left/Right key to change the current editable
bit. When editing one number, it increases/decreases
circularly, for example, pressing Up key can change to
9 from 0.
Figure 25. Edit Parameter Value
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
23
Chapter 3—Menu Overview
1.
If password is in use, password shall be needed to check
before edit parameter value.
2.
If no action in 1min, the password shall need to be
checked again.
3.
If Parameter locked is enabled, *Locked* shall be shown
if user tries to edit the parameter.
Figure 26. Parameter Locked
T1—Favorite
Favorites collect the user’s favorite parameters. User can
add one parameter into favorite list by “FAVORITE” soft key,
and can delete it from favorite list by “DELETE” soft key.
If a parameter has not been added into the favorite list, the
soft keys “FAVORITE” will be shown in parameter page (see
Figure 11 on Page 11). If it has been added into the favorite
list, the soft key “FAVORITE” will not be shown.
If a parameter has been added to the favorite list, it shall
appear in the favorite menu. Then when you enter into the
favorite menu, the soft keys “DELETE” will be shown. This
allows you to remove the selected parameter from favorite
list (see Figure 12 on Page 11).
After one parameter is removed from favorite list, the next
parameter in the favorite list will be selected by default.
24
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 4—Startup
Chapter 4—Startup
Startup Wizard Page
The Startup Wizard is a sub-menu of main menu. Once user
enters into this menu, the Startup Wizard will begin.
In the Startup Wizard, you will be prompted for essential
information needed by the drive so that it can start
controlling your motor. During this process, you can also
select the application that best suits your needs.
The parameters in Startup Wizard shall be in the following
sequence: Language, Real Time Clock, Daylight Saving,
Application, Min Frequency, Max Frequency, Motor Nom
Current, Current Limit, Motor Nom Speed, Motor PF, Motor
Nom Volt, Motor Nom Frequency, Motor Nom Power,
Application Setup.
If user changes the Application, the drive and keypad will
reset.
The Startup Wizard setup is as Figure 27 shown on the
following page.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
25
Chapter 4—Startup
Figure 27. Startup Wizard (1 of 2)
26
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 4—Startup
Figure 28. Startup Wizard (2 of 2)
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
27
Chapter 4—Startup
Startup Wizard
Table 10. Startup Wizard Instructions
In the Startup Wizard, you will be prompted for essential
information needed by the drive so that it can start
controlling your process. In the Wizard, you will need
the following keypad buttons:
Item
Description
1
Startup Wizard
Press OK?
2
Language
0 = English
1 = ѝ᮷
2 = Deutsch
3
Real Time Clock
yy.mm.dd
hh:mm:ss
4
Daylight Saving
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
5
Application
0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
6
Min Frequency
Min: 0.00Hz
Max: Max Frequency
7
Max Frequency
Min: Min Frequency
Max: 400.00Hz
Back/Reset button.
8
Motor Nom Current
If this button was pressed at the first question,
the Startup Wizard will be cancelled.
Min: 0.1A
Max: 500.0A
9
Current Limit
Min: Ih*1/10
Max: Ih*2
10
Motor Nom Speed
Min: Ih*1/10
Max: Ih*2
11
Motor PF
Min: 0.30
Max: 1.0
12
Motor Nom Volt
Min: 180V
Max: 690V
13
Motor Nom Freq
Min: 30.00 Hz
Max: 400.00 Hz
14
Motor Nom Power
Min: 0.1 kW
Max:5000.0 kW
15
Application Mini-Wizard
Press OK?
Up/Down buttons.
Use these to change value.
OK button.
Confirm selection with this button, and enter into
next question.
Once you have connected power to your Eaton PowerXL
DG1 frequency converter, and the Startup Wizard is enabled,
follow these instructions to easily set up your drive.
Now the Startup Wizard is done. It won’t show again when
next power up. If you want to reset it, please set the Startup
Wizard (P21.1.9) or select it from the main menu screen to
enable and cycle the power to the drive.
28
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 4—Startup
Application Macro Mini-Wizard
Multi-Pump and Fan Control Mini-Wizard
PID Mini-Wizard
Table 11. Multi-Pump and Fan Control
The PID Mini-Wizard is activated in the Quick Setup menu.
This Wizard assumes that you are going to use the PID
controller in the “one feedback/one setpoint” mode. The
control place will be I/O A and the default process unit “%”.
The PID Mini-Wizard asks for the following values to be set:
Item
Description
16
PID 1 Process Unit
Select Units
17
PID 1 Set Point 1 Source
Select Function
18
PID 1 Keypad Set Point 1
Min: PID 1 Process Unit Min
Max: PID 1 Process Unit Max
Table 12. PID Mini-Wizard Values
Item
Description
19
PID 1 Feedback 1 Source
Select Input
16
PID 1 Process Unit
Select Units
20
PID 1 Feedback 1 Min
Min: –200%
Max: 200%
17
PID 1 Set Point 1 Source
Select Function
21
PID 1 Feedback 1 Max
Min: –200%
Max: 200%
18
PID 1 Keypad Set Point 1
Min: PID 1 Process Unit Min
Max: PID 1 Process Unit Max
22
Motor Number
Min: 1
Max: 5
19
PID 1 Feedback 1 Source
Select Input
20
PID 1 Feedback 1 Min
23
Bandwidth
Min: 0%
Max: 100%
Min: –200%
Max: 200%
21
PID 1 Feedback 1 Min
24
Bandwidth Delay
Min: 0s
Max: 3600s
Min: –200%
Max: 200%
25
Interlock Enable
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
29
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Introduction
●
Reference frequency limit supervision
The Standard Application is typically used in basic motor
control scenarios where multiple pump control, PID loops,
or advanced control loops are not required. It provides the
ability for the user to define its local and remote control and
reference signals. In addition there is the ability to scale the
analog input and output signals to be read based off the
desired motor response. There are also 8 digital inputs,
3 relay outputs, and 1 digital output that can be programmed
to allow for control schemes that require the drive to have
certain functions. It provides full customization on the motor
control sequence with the ability to be in frequency or speed
control mode, and tuning of the V/Hz curve can be selected.
Drive/Motor protections can be customized to defined
actions for added user control. Below is a list of other
features that are available in the Standard Application.
●
Power limit supervision
●
Analog input limit supervision
●
Auto restart
●
Power loss ride through
●
Trend buffer
●
Programmable switching frequency
●
Multi-Preset speeds
●
Emergency stop
●
Line start lockout
●
Fan control
●
DC brake
●
Flux brake
●
Dynamic brake
Standard Application includes functions:
●
Selectable digital input function
●
Selectable digital output function
●
Reference filter, scaling, inversion, offset and range
●
Output signal filter, scaling, inversion, offset and range
●
Selectable analog output function
●
Programmable start/stop and reverse signal logic
●
Two independent set of Acceleration/Deceleration ramps
●
S curves
●
Skip frequency
●
Start source (Local/Remote control function)
●
Reference source
●
Flying start
●
Jog
●
Volts per Hertz control
●
Real time clock function—RTC time display
●
Drive temperature limit supervision
●
Output frequency 1 limit supervision
●
Output frequency 2 limit supervision
●
Torque limit supervision
I/O Controls
●
“Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
options are available. For use of the drives control board
inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
option card.
●
“Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
relay output or a digital output, that is assigned a parameter.
Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
The parameters of the Standard Application are explained
on Page 130 of this manual, “Description of Parameters.”
The explanations are arranged according to the parameter
number.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
30
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Control I/O Configuration
●
●
Run 240 Vac and 24 Vdc control wiring in separate conduit
Communication wire to be shielded
Table 13. I/O Connection
SW1
AI1 0–10V
AI2 SW1
AI2 SW2
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–10V
AI2 10–10V
SW2
On
Off
Res
Pin
i
31
(RS-485 matching resistor)
Signal Name Signal
Default Setting
Description
1
+10V
Ref. Output Voltage
—
10 Vdc Supply Source
2
AI1+
Analog Input 1
0–10V
Voltage Speed Reference (Programmable to 4 mA to 20 mA)
3
AI1–
Analog Input 1 Ground
—
Analog Input 1 Common (Ground)
4
AI2+
Analog Input 2
4 mA to 20 mA
Current Speed Reference (Programmable to 0–10V)
5
AI2–
Analog Input 2 Ground
—
Analog Input 2 Common (Ground)
6
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
7
DIN5
Digital Input 5
Preset Speed B0
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 1
8
DIN6
Digital Input 6
Preset Speed B1
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 2
9
DIN7
Digital Input 7
Emergency Stop (TI–)
Input forces VFD output to shut off
10
DIN8
Digital Input 8
Force Remote (TI+)
Input takes VFD from Local to Remote
11
CMB
DI5 to DI8 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
12
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
13
24V
+24 Vdc Output
—
14
DO1
Digital Output 1
Ready
Shows the drive is ready to run
15
24Vo
+24 Vdc Output
—
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
16
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
17
AO1+
Analog Output 1
Output Frequency
Shows Output frequency to motor 0–60 Hz (4 mA to 20 mA)
18
AO2+
Analog Output 2
Motor Current
Shows Motor current of motor 0–FLA (4 mA to 20 mA)
19
24Vi
+24 Vdc Input
—
External control voltage input
20
DIN1
Digital Input 1
Run Forward
Input starts drive in forward direction (start enable)
21
DIN2
Digital Input 2
Run Reverse
Input starts drive in reverse direction (start enable)
22
DIN3
Digital Input 3
External Fault
Input causes drive to fault
23
DIN4
Digital Input 4
Fault Reset
Input resets active faults
24
CMA
DI1 to DI4 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
25
A
RS-485 Signal A
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
26
B
RS-485 Signal B
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
27
R3NO
Relay 3 Normally Open
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
28
R1NC
Relay 1 Normally Closed
Run
Relay output 1 shows VFD is in a run state
29
R1CM
Relay 1 Common
30
R1NO
Relay 1 Normally Open
31
R3CM
Relay 3 Common
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
32
R2NC
Relay 2 Normally Closed
Fault
Relay output 2 shows VFD is in a fault state
33
R2CM
Relay 2 Common
34
R2NO
Relay 2 Normally Open
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Standard Application—Parameters List
On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter
groups. The parameter descriptions are given on Page 130, “Description of Parameters.”
The descriptions are arranged according to the parameter number.
Column explanations:
Code = Location indication on the keypad; shows the operator the present parameter number
Parameter = Name of parameter
Min = Minimum value of parameter
Max = Maximum value of parameter
Unit = Unit of parameter value; given if available
Default = Value preset by factory
ID = ID number of the parameter
Table 14. Monitor—M
Code
Parameter
Unit
Default
ID
M1
Output Frequency
Min.
Max.
Hz
0.00
1
M2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
M3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
M4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
M5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
M6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
M7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
M8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
M9
Unit Temperature
?
0.0
8
M10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
M12
Analog Input 1
Varies
0.00
10
M13
Analog Input 2
Varies
0.00
11
M14
Analog Output 1
Varies
0.00
25
M15
Analog Output 2
Varies
0.00
575
M16
DI1, DI2, DI3
0
12
M17
DI4, DI5, DI6
0
13
M18
DI7, DI8
0
576
M19
DO1
0
14
M20
RO1, RO2, RO3
0
557
M41
PT100 Temperature
1000.0
27
°C
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
32
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 14. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
M42
Last Active Fault
M43
RTC Battery Status
M44
Instance Motor Power
kW
M45
Energy Savings
Varies
M46
Multi-Monitoring
Default
ID
Note
0
28
0 = Null
1 = Over Current
2 = Over Voltage
3 = Earth Fault
4 = Charging Switch
5 = Emergency Stop
6 = Saturation Trip
7 = System Fault
8 = Undervoltage
9 = Input Phase Superv
10 = Output Phase Superv
11 = Brake Chopper Superv
12 = Drive Under Temp
13 = Drive Over Temp
14 = Motor Stalled
15 = Motor Over Temp
16 = Motor Under Load
17 = IP Address Conflict
18 = Power Board EEPROM Fault
19 = FRAM Fault
20 = S-Flash Fault
21 = MCU Watchdog Fault
22 = Start-up Prevent
23 = Thermistor Fault
24 = Fan Cooling
25 = Compatibility Fault
26 = Device Change
27 = Device Added
28 = Device Removed
29 = Device Unknown
30 = IGBT Over Temp
31 = Encoder Fault
32 = AI < 4 mA (4to20 mA)
33 = External Fault
34 = Keypad Comm Fault
35 = Fieldbus Fault
36 = Option Card Fault
37 = Bypass Overload
38 = Realtime Clock Fault
39 = PT100 Fault
40 = Motor ID Fault
41 = Current Measure Fault
42 = Power Wiring Error
43 = Control Board Overtemp
44 = Internal Control Supply
45 = Speed Search Fault
46 = Current Unbalance
47 = Replace Battery
48 = Replace Fan
49 = Safety Torque Off
50 = Current Limit Controller
51 = Over Voltage Controller
583
0 = Not Installed
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
0.00
1686
1, 2, 3
30
2119
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
33
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 15. Operate Mode—O
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
1
O1
Output Frequency
Hz
0.00
O2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
O3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
O4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
O5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
O6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
O7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
O8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
O9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
O10
Motor Temperature
R12 2
Keypad Reference
%
0.0
9
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
141
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Table 16. Basic Parameters—P1
Code
Parameter
P1.1 2
Min Frequency
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
101
P1.2 2
Max Frequency
Par. P1.1
400.00
Hz
Max Freq
102
P1.3 2
Accel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
103
P1.4 2
Decel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
104
P1.5 1
Motor Nom Current
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Drive Nom CT
486
P1.6 1
Motor Nom Speed
300
20000
rpm
Motor Nom Speed
489
P1.7 1
Motor PF
0.30
1.00
0.85
490
P1.8 1
Motor Nom Voltage
180
690
V
P1.9 1
Motor Nom Frequency
8.00
400.00
Hz
Motor Nom Freq
488
P1.10 2
Local/Remote Select
0
140
0 = Hold Last
1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
P1.11 2
Remote1 Control Place
0
135
0 = I/O Terminal
1 = Fieldbus
P1.12
Local Control Place
0
1695
0 = Keypad
1 = I/O Terminal
P1.13 12
Local Reference
6
136
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1 –AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = MIN(AI1,AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
P1.14 12
Remote1 Reference
1
137
See P1.12
P1.15 1
Reverse Enable
1
1679
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Motor Nom Voltage 487
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
34
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Note
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 17. Analog Input—P2
Code
Parameter
P2.1
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
AI1 Mode
1
222
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P2.2 2
AI1 Signal Range
0
175
0 = 0–100%
1 = 20–100%
2 = Customized
P2.3 2
AI1 Custom Min
P2.4 2
P2.5 2
P2.6 2
AI1 Signal Invert
P2.7 2
AI1 Joystick Hyst
0.00
20.00
P2.8 2
AI1 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
P2.9 2
AI1 Sleep Delay
0.00
P2.10 2
AI1 Joystick Offset
–50.00
P2.11
AI2 Mode
P2.12 2
AI2 Signal Range
P2.13 2
AI2 Custom Min
0.00
Par. P2.14
%
P2.14 2
AI2 Custom Max
Par. P2.13
100.00
%
100.00
185
P2.15 2
AI2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
182
P2.16 2
AI2 Signal Invert
P2.17 2
AI2 Joystick Hyst
0.00
20.00
P2.18 2
AI2 Sleep Limit
0.00
P2.19 2
AI2 Sleep Delay
P2.20 2
AI2 Joystick Offset
P2.21 2
P2.22 2
0.00
Par. P2.4
%
0.00
176
AI1 Custom Max
Par. P2.3
100.00
%
100.00
177
AI1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
174
0
181
%
0.00
178
%
0.00
179
320.00
s
0.00
180
50.00
%
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
0.00
133
0
223
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
2 = –10 to +10V
1
183
See P2.2
0.00
184
0
189
%
0.00
186
100.00
%
0.00
187
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
188
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
134
AI Ref Scale Min Value
0.00
Par. P2.22
Hz
0.00
144
AI Ref Scale Max Value
Par. P2.21
400.00
Hz
0.00
145
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
35
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 18. Digital Input—P3
Code
Parameter
P3.1 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Start/Stop Logic
0
143
0 = Forward–Reverse
1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
3 = Start Pulse–Stop Pulse
P3.2 2
Start Signal 1
2
190
0 = DigIN:ForceOpen
1 = DigIN:ForceClose
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
P3.3 2
Start Signal 2
3
191
See P3.2
P3.4 12
Thermistor Input Select
0
881
0 = Digital Input
1 = Thermistor Input
P3.5 2
Reverse
0
198
See P3.2
P3.6 2
Ext. Fault Close
4
192
See P3.2
P3.7 2
Ext. Fault Open
1
193
See P3.2
P3.8 2
Fault Reset
5
200
See P3.2
P3.9 2
Run Enable
1
194
See P3.2
P3.10 2
Preset Speed B0
6
205
See P3.2
P3.11 2
Preset Speed B1
7
206
See P3.2
P3.12 2
Preset Speed B2
0
207
See P3.2
P3.15 2
Accel/Decel Time Set
0
195
See P3.2
P3.16 2
Accel/Decel Prohibit
0
201
See P3.2
P3.17 2
No Access To Param
0
215
See P3.2
P3.21 2
Remote Control
9
196
See P3.2
P3.22 2
Local Control
0
197
See P3.2
P3.23 2
Remote1/2 Select
0
209
See P3.2
P3.26 2
DC Brake Enable
0
202
See P3.2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
36
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 18. Digital Input—P3, continued
Code
Parameter
P3.32 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Jog Enable
0
199
See P3.2
P3.36 2
AI Ref Source Select
0
208
See P3.2
P3.42 2
Emergency Stop
8
747
See P3.2
Table 19. Analog Output—P4
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P4.1 2
AO1 Mode
Min.
0
227
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P4.2 2
AO1 Function
1
146
0 = Not Used
1 = Output Frequency
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
5 = Motor Torque (0–Nom)
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
21 = Output Freq (–2 to +2N)
22 = Motor Torque (–2 to +2N)
23 = Motor Power (–2 to +2N)
24 = PT100 Temperature
P4.3 2
AO1 Minimum
1
149
0 = 0V / 0 mA
1 = 2V / 4 mA
P4.4 2
AO1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
147
P4.5 2
AO1 Scale
10
1000
%
100
150
P4.6 2
AO1 Inversion
0
148
P4.7 2
AO1 Offset
0.00
173
P4.8 2
AO2 Mode
0
228
P4.9 2
AO2 Function
4
229
See P4.2
P4.10 2
AO2 Minimum
1
232
See P4.3
P4.11 2
AO2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
230
P4.12 2
AO2 Scale
10
1000
%
100
233
P4.13 2
AO2 Inversion
0
231
P4.14 2
AO2 Offset
0.00
234
–100.00
–100.00
Max.
100.00
100.00
Unit
%
%
See P2.6
See P4.1
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
37
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 20. Digital Output—P5
Code
Parameter
P5.1 2
Min.
Default
ID
Note
DO1 Function
1
151
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
10 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
13 = Overheat Warning
14 = Overcurrent Regular
15 = Overvoltage Regular
16 = Undervoltage Regular
17 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
20 = Torq Limit Superv
21 = Ref Limit Superv
22 = Control from I/O
23 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
24 = Thermistor Fault Output
27 = Ext Fault/Warning
28 = Remote Control
29 = Jog Speed Select
30 = Motor Therm Protection
31 = FB Digital Input 1
32 = FB Digital Input 2
33 = FB Digital Input 3
34 = FB Digital Input 4
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
40 = Power Limit Superv
41 = Temp Limit Superv
42 = Analog Input Superv
P5.2 2
RO1 Function
2
152
See P5.1
P5.3 2
RO2 Function
3
153
See P5.1
P5.4 2
RO3 Function
7
538
See P5.1
P5.5 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv
0
154
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
P5.6 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv Val
P5.7 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv
P5.8 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv Val
P5.9 2
Torque Limit Supv
P5.10 2
Torque Limit Supv Val
P5.11 2
Ref Limit Supv
P5.12 2
Ref Limit Supv Val
P5.15 2
Temp Limit Supv
0.00
0.00
–300.0
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
300.0
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Hz
%
Hz
0.00
155
0
157
0.00
158
0
159
100.0
160
0
161
0.00
162
0
165
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
38
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
See P5.11
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 20. Digital Output—P5, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P5.16 2
Temp Limit Supv Val
–10.0
75.0
°C
40.0
166
P5.17 2
Power Limit Supv
P5.18 2
Power Limit Supv Val
P5.19 2
Note
0
167
0.0
168
AI Supv Select
0
170
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
P5.20 2
AI Limit Supv
0
171
See P5.11
P5.21 2
AI Limit Supv Val
0.00
100.00
%
0.00
172
P5.30
RO1 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2111
0.0
200.0
%
P5.31
RO1 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2112
P5.32
RO2 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2113
See P5.11
P5.33
RO2 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2114
P5.34
RO3 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2115
P5.35
RO3 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2116
P5.36
RO3 Reverse
0
1
0
2117
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
Min.
Max.
Default
ID
Note
Table 21. Drive Control—P7
Code
Parameter
P7.1 2
Remote 2 Control Place
1
138
See P1.11
P7.2 12
Remote 2 Reference
7
139
See P1.12
P7.3 2
Keypad Reference
0.00
141
P7.4 2
Keypad Direction
0
116
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
P7.5 2
Keypad Stop
1
114
0 = Enabled-Keypad Operation
1 = Always Enabled
P7.6 2
Jog Reference
0.00
117
P7.9 2
Start Mode
0
252
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
P7.10 2
Stop Mode
1
253
0 = Coasting
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2
Ramp 1 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
247
P7.12 2
Ramp 2 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
248
P7.13 2
Accel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
249
P7.14 2
Decel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
250
P7.15 2
Skip F1 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.16
Hz
0.00
256
P7.16 2
Skip F1 High Limit
Par. P7.15
400.00
Hz
0.00
257
P7.17 2
Skip F2 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.18
Hz
0.00
258
P7.18 2
Skip F2 High Limit
Par. P7.17
400.00
Hz
0.00
259
P7.19 2
Skip F3 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.20
Hz
0.00
260
P7.20 2
Skip F3 High Limit
Par. P7.19
400.00
Hz
0.00
261
P7.21 2
Prohibit Accel/Decel Ramp 0.1
P7.22 2
Power Loss Function
P7.23 2
Power Loss Time
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.1
0.3
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Hz
10.0
5.0
s
1.0
264
0
267
2.0
268
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
39
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 21. Drive Control—P7, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
P7.24
Currency
0
8
P7.25
Energy Cost
P7.26
Data Type
0
4
P7.27
Energy Savings Reset
0
Min.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
$
2121
0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
0
2122
s
0
2123
0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Monthly Avg
3 = Yearly Avg
1
s
0
2124
0 = No Action
1 = Reset
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
287
0 = Freq Control
1 = Speed Control
Drive Nom VT
107
Table 22. Motor Control—P8
Code
Parameter
P8.1 12
Motor Control Mode
P8.2 1
Current Limit
P8.3 12
V/Hz Optimization
0
109
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.4 12
V/Hz Ratio
0
108
0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
3 = Linear + Flux Optimization
P8.5 12
Field Weakening Point
Field Weakening
Point Freq
289
P8.6 12
290
P8.7 12
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
8.00
400.00
Hz
Voltage at FWP
10.00
200.00
%
100.00
V/Hz Mid Frequency
0.00
Par. P8.5
Hz
V/Hz Midpoint Freq 291
P8.8 12
V/Hz Mid Voltage
0.00
100.00
%
100.00
P8.9 12
Zero Frequency Voltage
0.00
40.00
%
0.00
293
P8.10 2
Switching Frequency
Min Switching
Freq
Max Switching kHz
Freq
Default Switching
Freq
288
P8.11 2
Sine Filter Enable
0
1665
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.12 12
Overvoltage Control
1
294
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.17 2
Frequency Ramp Out
FilterTime Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1585
P8.39 2
Start Boost Rise Time
-1
32000
s
0
1622
292
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
40
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 23. Protections—P9
Code
Parameter
P9.1 12
4 mA Input Fault
Min.
P9.2 12
4 mA Fault Frequency
P9.3 12
External Fault
P9.4 12
Input Phase Fault
P9.5 12
Uvolt Fault Response
2
330
See P9.11
P9.6 12
Output Phase Fault
2
308
See P9.11
P9.7 12
Ground Fault
2
309
See P9.11
P9.8 12
Motor Thermal Protection
2
310
See P9.11
P9.9 2
Motor Thermal F0 Current
0.0
150.0
%
40.0
311
P9.10 2
Motor Thermal Time
1
200
min
12
312
P9.11 12
Stall Protection
0
313
P9.12 2
Stall Current Limit
0.1
Active Motor
Nom I*2
A
Active Motor Nom
I*13/10
314
P9.13 2
Stall Time Limit
1.0
120.0
s
15.0
315
P9.14 2
Stall Frequency Limit
1.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
316
P9.15 12
Underload Protection
0
317
P9.16 2
Underload Fnom Torque
10.0
150.0
%
50.0
318
P9.17 2
Underload F0 Torque
5.0
150.0
%
10.0
319
P9.18 2
Underload Time Limit
2.00
600.00
s
20.00
320
P9.19 12
Thermistor Fault Response
2
333
See P9.11
P9.20 2
Line Start Lockout
2
750
0 = Disabled, No Change
1 = Enable, No Change
2 = Disabled, Changed
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.21 12
Fieldbus Fault Response
2
334
See P9.11
P9.22 12
OPTCard Fault Response
2
335
See P9.11
P9.23 12
Unit Under Temp Prot
2
1564
See P9.11
P9.24 2
Wait Time
0.10
10.00
s
0.50
321
0.00
60.00
s
30.00
322
0
323
1
324
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Default
ID
Note
0
306
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Warning: Previous Freq
3 = Warning: Preset Freq
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
0.00
331
2
307
See P9.11
2
332
See P9.11
P9.25 2
Trail Time
P9.26 2
Start Function
P9.27 2
Undervoltage Attempts
P9.28 2
Overvoltage Attempts
0
10
1
325
P9.29 2
Overcurrent Attempts
0
3
1
326
P9.30 2
4 mA Fault Attempts
0
10
1
327
P9.31 2
Motor Temp Fault Attempts 0
10
1
329
P9.32 2
External Fault Attempts
0
10
0
328
P9.33 2
Underload Attempts
0
10
1
336
0
10
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
See P9.11
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
2 = Start
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
41
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 23. Protections—P9, continued
Code
Parameter
P9.34 12
P9.35 12
Min.
Default
ID
Note
RTC Fault
1
955
See P9.11
PT100 Fault Response
2
337
See P9.11
P9.36 12
Replace Battery Fault
Response
1
1256
See P9.11
P9.37 12
Replace Fan Fault Response
1
1257
See P9.11
P9.38 12
IP Address Confliction Resp
1
1678
See P9.11
P9.39
Cold Weather Mode
0
2126
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
Max.
Unit
1
P9.40
Cold Weather Voltage Level 0
20
%
2
2127
P9.41
Cold Weather Time Out
10
min
3
2128
P9.42
Cold Weather Password
P9.43
Under Temp Fault Override 0
0
2130
0 = No
1 = Yes
Note
0
2129
1
Table 24. Preset Speed—P12
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P12.1 2
Preset Speed 1
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
5.00
105
P12.2 2
Preset Speed 2
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
10.00
106
P12.3 2
Preset Speed 3
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
118
P12.4 2
Preset Speed 4
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
20.00
119
P12.5 2
Preset Speed 5
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
120
P12.6 2
Preset Speed 6
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
30.00
121
P12.7 2
Preset Speed 7
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
35.00
122
Table 25. Brake—P14
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P14.1 12
DC-Brake Current
Drive Nom
CT*15/100
Drive Nom
CT*15/10
A
Drive Nom
CT*1/2
254
P14.2 12
Start DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
263
P14.3 12
Stop DC-Brake Frequency
0.10
10.00
Hz
1.50
262
P14.4 12
Stop DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
255
P14.5 12
Brake Chopper
0
251
0 = Disabled
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12
Flux Brake
0
266
0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12
Flux Brake Current
Active Motor
Nom I*1/2
265
Active Motor
Nom I*1/10
Par. P8.2
A
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
42
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 26. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1
Code
Parameter
P20.1.1 2
P20.1.2 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
FB Data Output 1 Sel
1
1556
FB Data Output 2 Sel
2
1557
P20.1.3 2
FB Data Output 3 Sel
3
1558
P20.1.4 2
FB Data Output 4 Sel
4
1559
P20.1.5 2
FB Data Output 5 Sel
5
1560
P20.1.6 2
FB Data Output 6 Sel
6
1561
P20.1.7 2
FB Data Output 7 Sel
7
1562
P20.1.8 2
FB Data Output 8 Sel
359
1563
Default
ID
Note
0
586
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
Table 27. Modbus RTU—P20.2
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.2.1
RS485 Comm Set
P20.2.2
Slave Address
18
587
P20.2.3
Baud Rate
2
584
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
P20.2.4
Parity Type
2
585
0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
P20.2.5
Protocol Status
0
588
0 = Initial
1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6
Slave Busy
0
589
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
P20.2.7
Parity Error
0
590
P20.2.8
Slave Fault
0
591
P20.2.9
Last Fault Response
0
592
P20.2.10
Comm Timeout Modbus RTU
ms
2000
593
Unit
Default
ID
Note
2
594
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
1
595
1
Max.
Unit
247
Table 28. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2
Code
Parameter
P20.2.11
BACnet Baud Rate
P20.2.12
MAC Address
0
127
0
4194302
P20.2.13
Instance Number
P20.2.14
Comm Timeout BACnet
P20.2.15
P20.2.16
Min.
Max.
0
596
6000
598
Protocol Status
0
599
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Fault Code
0
600
0 = None
1 = Sole Master
ms
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
43
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 29. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.3.1
IP Address Mode
P20.3.2
Active IP Address
1507
P20.3.3
Active Subnet Mask
1509
P20.3.4
Active Default Gateway
1511
P20.3.5
MAC Address
1513
P20.3.6
Static IP Address
192.168.1.254
1501
P20.3.7
Static Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
1503
P20.3.8
Static Default Gateway
192.168.1.1
1505
P20.3.9
EtherNet/IP Protocol Status
0
608
P20.3.10
Connection Limit
2
609
P20.3.11
Modbus TCP Unit ID
1
610
P20.3.12
Comm Timeout Modbus TCP
P20.3.13
P20.3.14
0
Max.
Unit
2
ms
Default
ID
Note
1
1500
0 = Static IP
1 = DHCP with AutoIP
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
2000
611
Protocol Status
0
612
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Slave Busy
0
613
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
0
614
Note: Codes P20.3.15–P20.3.17 are for Modbus TCP.
P20.3.15
Parity Error
P20.3.16
Slave Failure
0
615
P20.3.17
Last Fault Response
0
616
Default
ID
Note
Table 30. Basic Setting—P21.1
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
P21.1.1
Language
0
340
0 = English
1 = English
2 = English
P21.1.2 1
Application
0
142
0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
P21.1.3
Parameter Sets
0
619
0 = No
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4
Up To Keypad
0
620
See P21.3.1
P21.1.5
Down From Keypad
0
621
0 = No
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.6
Parameter Comparison
0
623
0 = No
1 = Compare with Keypad
2 = Compare with Default
3 = Compare with Set 1
4 = Compare with Set 2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
44
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 5—Standard Application
Table 30. Basic Setting—P21.1, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
P21.1.7
Password
0
9999
P21.1.8
Parameter Lock
P21.1.9
P21.1.10
P21.1.11
Timeout Time
0
65535
P21.1.12
Contrast Adjust
5
18
P21.1.13
Backlight Time
0
65535
P21.1.14
Fan Control
P21.1.15
HMI ACK Timeout
200
5000
P21.1.16
HMI Retry Number
1
10
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
0
624
0
625
0 = Change Enable
1 = Change Disable
Multimonitor Set
0
627
See P21.1.8
Default Page
0
628
0 = None
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
30
629
12
630
10
631
3
632
200
633
5
634
Default
ID
s
min
ms
Note
0 = Continuous
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp
Table 31. Version Info—P21.2
Code
Parameter
Unit
P21.2.1
Keypad Software Version
640
P21.2.2
Motor Control Software
Version
642
P21.2.3
Application Software
Version
Note
App Firmware
644
Default
ID
Note
Table 32. Application Info—P21.3
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
P21.3.1
Brake Chopper Stat
646
0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.3.2
Brake Resistor
647
See P21.3.1
P21.3.3
Serial Number
648
Table 33. User Info—P21.4
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P21.4.1
Real Time Clock
Min.
Max.
Unit
0.0.0.1:1:13
566
P21.4.2
Daylight Saving
0
582
P21.4.3
Total MWh Count
Mwh
Total Power Day Count
603
P21.4.5
Total Power Hr Count
606
P21.4.6
Trip MWh Count
Clear Trip MWh Count
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
601
P21.4.4
P21.4.7
Note
Mwh
604
0
635
P21.4.8
Trip Power Day Count
636
P21.4.9
Trip Power Hr Count
637
P21.4.10
Clear Trip Power Count
0
639
0 = Not Reset
1 = Reset
See P21.4.8
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
45
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Introduction
I/O Controls
The Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application is designed to
be used in applications where multiple pumps or fan systems
are used to maintain a desired flow rate, pressure, or
temperature value. It gives the ability to use a single PID loop
to control one drive and have auxiliary motors connected via
drives or contactors start and stop based off the desired
process. It also provides the ability to auto-change between
the multiple motors to keep run times equal. Controlwise it
allows for 2 control and reference place selections with
8 digital inputs and 2 analog inputs that are programmable.
For monitoring the system and turning on aux motors, there
are 3 programmable relay outputs, 1 digital output, and
2 sets of analog outputs that are programmable. The
application allows for full customization of the motor control
scheme with frequency or speed control along with
customizing the V/Hz curve. Drive/Motor protections can be
customized to defined actions. Below is a list of other
features in addition to the Standard Application features that
are available in the Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application.
●
Select the Multi-Pump and Fan Application in menu P21.1.2.
Multi-Pump and Fan includes all the functions in Standard
Application and Additional functions:
“Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
options are available. For use of the drives control board
inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
option card.
●
“Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
relay output or a digital output, that is assigned a parameter.
Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
The parameters of the Multi-Pump and Fan Control
Application are explained on Page 130 of this manual,
“Description of Parameters.” The explanations are arranged
according to the parameter
●
Damper control
●
Fire mode
●
Smoke purge mode
●
Interlock for motors
●
Multi-Pump control
●
Auto change function
●
Bypass
●
Real time clock function—Timer
●
Real time clock function—Interval
●
PM setback
●
Two independent set of motor Parameter
●
PID
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
46
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Control Examples
Figure 29. Example of Two-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram
47
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Figure 30. Two-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram
230 Vac
26
24 Vdc
RO1
13
DG1 Control Board
29
RO2
17 DIN2
27
Autom. 0 Line
S1
K1
K2
K1
K2
K1
K1.1
M1/DG1
16
Autom. 0 Line
S2
K2
K1.1
DIN3
30
K2.1
K2
M1/Line
K2
K2.1
M2/DG1
M2/Line
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
48
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Figure 31. Example of Three-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram
F3
FY
Figure 32. Three-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram
230 Vac
DG1 CB
DIN3
DG1 CB
24 Vdc
13
26
16
17 DIN2
29
DG1
CB
27
K2
K1.1
K1
M1/DG1
49
33
A O Line
S2
K3
K3
S3
K1
K3
K1
K1
K2.1
K1.1
K2
M1/Line
32
DG1
CB
A O Line
S1
K2
15
30
A O Line
K3
DG1 CB
DIN4
M2/DG1
K1
K2
K1
K2
K2
K2.1
M2/Line
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
K3.1
K3
M3/DG1
K3
K3.1
M3/Line
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Figure 33. Example of the Function of the PFC Application with Three Auxiliary Drives
On
Off
On
Interlock 3 Off
On
Interlock 2
Off
On
Interlock 1
Off
Interlock 4
Interlocks
Relay
Control
5
7
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Aux. 3 Running
Aux. 2 Running
Aux. 1 Running
Main Drive Running
Max. Frequency
2
Aux. 1, 2 and 3
Start Frequency
4
6
8
Main Drive
Output
Frequency
3
Aux. 1, 2 and 3
Stop Frequency
Min. Frequency
1
f
8
100%
Main
Drive
Aux.
Drive
2 4
PID Output
M.
D.
Aux. Drive 2
5
Aux. Drive 3
2
Aux. Drive 1
1
t
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
50
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Control I/O Configuration
●
●
Run 240 Vac and 24 Vdc control wiring in separate conduit
Communication wire to be shielded
Table 34. Multi-Pump and Fan Application Default I/O Configuration
SW1
AI1 0–10V
AI2 SW1
AI2 SW2
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–10V
AI2 10–10V
SW2
On
Off
Res
Pin
i
(RS-485 matching resistor)
Signal Name Signal
Default Setting
Description
1
+10V
Ref. Output Voltage
—
10 Vdc Supply Source
2
AI1+
Analog Input 1
0–10V
Voltage Speed Reference (Programmable to 4 mA to 20 mA)
3
AI1–
Analog Input 1 Ground
—
Analog Input 1 Common (Ground)
4
AI2+
Analog Input 2
4 mA to 20 mA
Current Speed Reference (Programmable to 0–10V)
5
AI2–
Analog Input 2 Ground
—
Analog Input 2 Common (Ground)
6
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
7
DIN5
Digital Input 5
Preset Speed B0
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 1
8
DIN6
Digital Input 6
Preset Speed B1
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 2
9
DIN7
Digital Input 7
Emergency Stop (TI–)
Input forces VFD output to shut off
10
DIN8
Digital Input 8
Force Remote (TI+)
Input takes VFD from Local to Remote
11
CMB
DI5 to DI8 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
12
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
13
24V
+24 Vdc Output
—
14
DO1
Digital Output 1
Ready
Shows the drive is ready to run
15
24Vo
+24 Vdc Output
—
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
16
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
17
AO1+
Analog Output 1
Output Frequency
Shows Output frequency to motor 0–60 Hz (4 mA to 20 mA)
18
AO2+
Analog Output 2
Motor Current
Shows Motor current of motor 0–FLA (4 mA to 20 mA)
19
24Vi
+24 Vdc Input
—
External control voltage input
20
DIN1
Digital Input 1
Run Forward
Input starts drive in forward direction (start enable)
21
DIN2
Digital Input 2
Run Reverse
Input starts drive in reverse direction (start enable)
22
DIN3
Digital Input 3
External Fault
Input causes drive to fault
23
DIN4
Digital Input 4
Fault Reset
Input resets active faults
24
CMA
DI1 to DI4 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
25
A
RS-485 Signal A
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
26
B
RS-485 Signal B
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
27
R3NO
Relay 3 Normally Open
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
28
R1NC
Relay 1 Normally Closed
Run
Relay output 1 shows VFD is in a run state
29
R1CM
Relay 1 Common
30
R1NO
Relay 1 Normally Open
31
R3CM
Relay 3 Common
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
32
R2NC
Relay 2 Normally Closed
Fault
Relay output 2 shows VFD is in a fault state
33
R2CM
Relay 2 Common
34
R2NO
Relay 2 Normally Open
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
51
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 35. Drive Communication Ports
Port
Communication
RJ45 Keypad Port
Upload/Download Parameters
USB to RJ45
Remote Mount Keypad
Ethernet
Upgrade Drive Firmware
USB to RJ45
RJ45 Ethernet Port
Upload/Download Parameters
Ethernet
Ethernet IP Communications
Ethernet
Modbus TCP Communications
Ethernet
RS-485 Serial Port
1
Upload/Download Parameters
Two-Wire Twisted Pair
Upgrade Drive Firmware
Two-Wire Twisted Pair
Modbus RTU Communications
Two-Wire Twisted Pair
BACnet MS/TP Communications
Two-Wire Twisted Pair
1
52
Shielded wire recommended.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Pump and Fan Application—Parameters List
On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter
groups. The parameter descriptions are given on Page 130, “Description of Parameters.”
The descriptions are arranged according to the parameter number.
Column explanations:
Code = Location indication on the keypad; shows the operator the present parameter number
Parameter = Name of parameter
Min = Minimum value of parameter
Max = Maximum value of parameter
Unit = Unit of parameter value; given if available
Default = Value preset by factory
ID = ID number of the parameter
Table 36. Monitor—M
Code
Parameter
Unit
Default
ID
M1
Output Frequency
Min.
Max.
Hz
0.00
1
M2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
M3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
M4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
M5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
M6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
M7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
M8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
M9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
M10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
M12
Analog Input 1
Varies
0.00
10
M13
Analog Input 2
Varies
0.00
11
M14
Analog Output 1
Varies
0.00
25
M15
Analog Output 2
Varies
0.00
575
M16
DI1, DI2, DI3
0
12
Note
M17
DI4, DI5, DI6
0
13
M18
DI7, DI8
0
576
M19
DO1
0
14
M20
RO1, RO2, RO3
0
557
M21
TC1, TC2, TC3
0
558
M22
Interval 1
0
559
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
M23
Interval 2
0
560
See M22
M24
Interval 3
0
561
See M22
M25
Interval 4
0
562
See M22
M26
Interval 5
0
563
See M22
M27
Timer 1
s
0
569
M28
Timer 2
s
0
571
M29
Timer 3
s
0
573
M30
PID1 Set Point
Varies
0.00
16
M31
PID1 Feedback
Varies
0.00
18
M32
PID1 Error Value
Varies
0.00
20
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
53
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 36. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
M33
PID1 Output
M34
PID1 Status
M40
Running Motors
M41
PT100 Temperature
M42
Last Active Fault
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
%
0.00
22
0
23
0
26
1000.0
27
0
28
°C
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
54
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Stopped
1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
0 = Null
1 = Over Current
2 = Over Voltage
3 = Earth Fault
4 = Charging Switch
5 = Emergency Stop
6 = Saturation Trip
7 = System Fault
8 = Undervoltage
9 = Input Phase Superv
10 = Output Phase Superv
11 = Brake Chopper Superv
12 = Drive Under Temp
13 = Drive Over Temp
14 = Motor Stalled
15 = Motor Over Temp
16 = Motor Under Load
17 = IP Address Conflict
18 = Power Board EEPROM Fault
19 = FRAM Fault
20 = S-Flash Fault
21 = MCU Watchdog Fault
22 = Start-up Prevent
23 = Thermistor Fault
24 = Fan Cooling
25 = Compatibility Fault
26 = Device Change
27 = Device Added
28 = Device Removed
29 = Device Unknown
30 = IGBT Over Temp
31 = Encoder Fault
32 = AI < 4 mA (4to20 mA)
33 = External Fault
34 = Keypad Comm Fault
35 = Fieldbus Fault
36 = Option Card Fault
37 = Bypass Overload
38 = Realtime Clock Fault
39 = PT100 Fault
40 = Motor ID Fault
41 = Current Measure Fault
42 = Power Wiring Error
43 = Control Board Overtemp
44 = Internal Control Supply
45 = Speed Search Fault
46 = Current Unbalance
47 = Replace Battery
48 = Replace Fan
49 = Safety Torque Off
50 = Current Limit Controller
51 = Over Voltage Controller
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 36. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
M43
RTC Battery Status
M44
Instance Motor Power
kW
M45
Energy Savings
Varies
M46
Multi-Monitoring
Default
0.0
ID
Note
583
0 = Not Installed
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
1686
2119
0, 1, 2
30
Table 37. Operate Mode—O
Code
Parameter
O1
Output Frequency
O2
O3
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Hz
0.00
1
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
O4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
O5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
O6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
O7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
O8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
O9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
O10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
R12 2
Keypad Reference
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
141
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Table 38. Basic Parameters—P1
Code
Parameter
Min.
P1.1 2
Min Frequency
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
101
P1.2 2
Max Frequency
Par. P1.1
400.00
Hz
Max Freq
102
P1.3 2
Accel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
103
P1.4 2
Decel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
104
P1.5 1
Motor Nom Current
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Drive Nom CT
486
P1.6 1
Motor Nom Speed
300
20000
rpm
Motor Nom Speed
489
P1.7 1
Motor PF
0.30
1.00
P1.8 1
Motor Nom Voltage
180
690
V
P1.9 1
Motor Nom Frequency
8.00
400.00
Hz
Motor Nom Freq
488
P1.10 2
Local/Remote Select
0
140
0 = Hold Last
1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
P1.11 2
Remote1 Control Place
0
135
0 = I/O Terminal
1 = Fieldbus
P1.12
Local Control Place
0
1695
0 = Keypad
1 = I/O Terminal
0.85
490
Motor Nom Volt
487
Note
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
55
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 38. Basic Parameters—P1, continued
Code
Parameter
P1.13 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Local Reference
6
136
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1 –AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = MIN(AI1,AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
17 = PID1 Control
P1.14 12
Remote1 Reference
1
137
See P1.12
P1.15 1
Reverse Enable
1
1679
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 39. Analog Input—P2
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P2.1
AI1 Mode
Min.
Max.
Unit
1
222
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P2.2 2
AI1 Signal Range
0
175
0 = 0–100%
1 = 20–100%
2 = Customized
P2.3 2
AI1 Custom Min
0.00
Par. P2.4
%
0.00
176
P2.4 2
AI1 Custom Max
Par. P2.3
100.00
%
100.00
177
P2.5 2
AI1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
174
P2.6 2
AI1 Signal Invert
0
181
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
P2.7 2
AI1 Joystick Hyst
0.00
20.00
%
0.00
178
P2.8 2
AI1 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
%
0.00
179
P2.9 2
AI1 Sleep Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
180
P2.10 2
AI1 Joystick Offset
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
133
P2.11
AI2 Mode
0
223
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
2 = –10 to +10V
P2.12 2
AI2 Signal Range
See P2.2
P2.13 2
AI2 Custom Min
P2.14 2
P2.15 2
P2.16 2
AI2 Signal Invert
P2.17 2
AI2 Joystick Hyst
P2.18 2
AI2 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
%
0.00
187
P2.19 2
AI2 Sleep Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
188
1
183
0.00
Par. P2.14
%
0.00
184
AI2 Custom Max
Par. P2.13
100.00
%
100.00
185
AI2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
182
0.00
20.00
%
0
189
0.00
186
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
56
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P2.6
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 39. Analog Input—P2, continued
Code
Parameter
P2.20 2
Min.
Max.
P2.21 2
P2.22 2
Unit
Default
ID
AI2 Joystick Offset
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
134
AI Ref Scale Min Value
0.00
Par. P2.22
Hz
0.00
144
AI Ref Scale Max Value
Par. P2.21
400.00
Hz
0.00
145
Min.
Max.
Unit
Note
Table 40. Digital Input—P3
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P3.1 12
Start/Stop Logic
0
143
0 = Forward–Reverse
1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
3 = Start Pulse–Stop Pulse
P3.2 2
Start Signal 1
2
190
0 = DigIN:ForceOpen
1 = DigIN:ForceClose
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
P3.3 2
Start Signal 2
3
191
See P3.2
P3.4 12
Thermistor Input Select
0
881
0 = Digital Input
1 = Thermistor Input
P3.5 2
Reverse
0
198
See P3.2
P3.6 2
Ext. Fault Close
4
192
See P3.2
P3.7 2
Ext. Fault Open
1
193
See P3.2
P3.8 2
Fault Reset
5
200
See P3.2
P3.9 2
Run Enable
1
194
See P3.2
P3.10 2
Preset Speed B0
6
205
See P3.2
P3.11 2
Preset Speed B1
7
206
See P3.2
P3.12 2
Preset Speed B2
0
207
See P3.2
P3.13 2
PID1 Control Enable
0
550
See P3.2
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
57
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 40. Digital Input—P3, continued
Code
Parameter
P3.15 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Accel/Decel Time Set
0
195
See P3.2
P3.16 2
Accel/Decel Prohibit
0
201
See P3.2
P3.17 2
No Access To Param
0
215
See P3.2
P3.21 2
Remote Control
9
196
See P3.2
P3.22 2
Local Control
0
197
See P3.2
P3.23 2
Remote1/2 Select
0
209
See P3.2
P3.24 2
Second Motor Para Select
0
217
See P3.2
P3.25 2
Bypass Start
0
218
See P3.2
P3.26 2
DC Brake Enable
0
202
See P3.2
P3.27 2
Smoke Mode
0
219
See P3.2
P3.28 2
Fire Mode
0
220
See P3.2
P3.29 2
Fire Mode Ref Select
0
221
See P3.2
P3.30 2
PID1 Set Point Select
0
351
See P3.2
P3.32 2
Jog Enable
0
199
See P3.2
P3.33 2
Start Timer 1
0
224
See P3.2
P3.34 2
Start Timer 2
0
225
See P3.2
P3.35 2
Start Timer 3
0
226
See P3.2
P3.36 2
AI Ref Source Select
0
208
See P3.2
P3.37 2
Motor Interlock 1
0
210
See P3.2
P3.38 2
Motor Interlock 2
0
211
See P3.2
P3.39 2
Motor Interlock 3
0
212
See P3.2
P3.40 2
Motor Interlock 4
0
213
See P3.2
P3.41 2
Motor Interlock 5
0
214
See P3.2
P3.42 2
Emergency Stop
8
747
See P3.2
P3.43 2
Bypass Overload
0
1246
See P3.2
P3.44
Fire Mode Reverse
0
2118
See P3.2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
58
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 41. Analog Output—P4
Code
Parameter
P4.1 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
AO1 Mode
0
227
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P4.2 2
AO1 Function
1
146
0 = Not Used
1 = Output Frequency
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
5 = Motor Torque (0–Nom)
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
10 = PID1 Feedback 1
11 = PID1 Feedback 2
12 = PID1 Control Error Value
13 = PID1 Control Output
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
21 = Output Freq (–2 to +2N)
22 = Motor Torque (–2 to +2N)
23 = Motor Power (–2 to +2N)
24 = PT100 Temperature
P4.3 2
AO1 Minimum
1
149
0 = 0V / 0 mA
1 = 2V / 4 mA
P4.4 2
AO1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
147
P4.5 2
AO1 Scale
10
1000
%
100
150
P4.6 2
AO1 Inversion
0
148
P4.7 2
AO1 Offset
–100.00
100.00
%
0.00
173
P4.8 2
AO2 Mode
0
228
See P4.1
P4.9 2
AO2 Function
4
229
See P4.2
P4.10 2
AO2 Minimum
1
232
See P4.3
P4.11 2
AO2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
230
P4.12 2
AO2 Scale
10
1000
%
100
233
P4.13 2
AO2 Inversion
0
231
P4.14 2
AO2 Offset
–100.00
100.00
%
0.00
234
See P2.6
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
59
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 42. Digital Output—P5
Code
Parameter
P5.1 2
Min.
Default
ID
Note
DO1 Function
1
151
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
10 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
11 = PID1 Superv
13 = Overheat Warning
14 = Overcurrent Regular
15 = Overvoltage Regular
16 = Undervoltage Regular
17 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
20 = Torq Limit Superv
21 = Ref Limit Superv
22 = Control from I/O
23 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
24 = Thermistor Fault Output
25 = Fire Mode
26 = Bypass Run
27 = Ext Fault/Warning
28 = Remote Control
29 = Jog Speed Select
30 = Motor Therm Protection
31 = FB Digital Input 1
32 = FB Digital Input 2
33 = FB Digital Input 3
34 = FB Digital Input 4
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
40 = Power Limit Superv
41 = Temp Limit Superv
42 = Analog Input Superv
43 = Motor 1 Control
44 = Motor 2 Control
45 = Motor 3 Control
46 = Motor 4 Control
47 = Motor 5 Control
49 = PID1 Sleep
P5.2 2
RO1 Function
2
152
See P5.1
P5.3 2
RO2 Function
3
153
See P5.1
P5.4 2
RO3 Function
7
538
See P5.1
P5.5 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv
0
154
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
P5.6 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv Val
P5.7 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv
P5.8 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv Val
0.00
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Hz
0.00
155
0
157
0.00
158
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
60
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 42. Digital Output—P5, continued
Code
Parameter
P5.9 2
Min.
Torque Limit Supv
P5.10 2
Torque Limit Supv Val
P5.11 2
Ref Limit Supv
P5.12 2
Ref Limit Supv Val
P5.15 2
Temp Limit Supv
P5.16 2
Temp Limit Supv Val
P5.17 2
Power Limit Supv
P5.18 2
Power Limit Supv Val
P5.19 2
AI Supv Select
P5.20 2
AI Limit Supv
P5.21 2
AI Limit Supv Val
P5.22 2
PID1 Superv Enable
P5.23 2
PID1 Superv Upper Limit
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1347
P5.24 2
PID1 Superv Lower Limit
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1349
P5.25 2
PID1 Superv Delay
0
3000
s
0
1351
P5.30
RO1 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2111
P5.31
RO1 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2112
P5.32
RO2 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2113
–300.0
0.00
–10.0
0.0
0.00
Max.
300.0
Par. P1.2
75.0
200.0
100.00
Unit
%
Hz
°C
%
%
Default
ID
Note
0
159
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
100.0
160
0
161
0.00
162
0
165
40.0
166
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
See P5.11
0
167
0.0
168
0
170
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
See P5.11
0
171
0.00
172
0
1346
P5.33
RO2 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2114
P5.34
RO3 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2115
P5.35
RO3 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2116
P5.36
RO3 Reverse
0
1
0
2117
Min.
Max.
See P5.11
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
Table 43. Drive Control—P7
Code
Parameter
P7.1 2
Remote 2 Control Place
P7.2 12
Remote 2 Reference
P7.3 2
Keypad Reference
P7.4 2
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
138
See P1.11
See P1.12
7
139
0.00
141
Keypad Direction
0
116
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
P7.5 2
Keypad Stop
1
114
0 = Enabled-Keypad Operation
1 = Always Enabled
P7.6 2
Jog Reference
0.00
117
P7.9 2
Start Mode
0
252
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
P7.10 2
Stop Mode
1
253
0 = Coasting
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2
Ramp 1 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
247
P7.12 2
Ramp 2 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
248
P7.13 2
Accel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
249
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
Hz
Hz
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
61
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 43. Drive Control—P7, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P7.14 2
Decel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
250
P7.15 2
Skip F1 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.16
Hz
0.00
256
P7.16 2
Skip F1 High Limit
Par. P7.15
400.00
Hz
0.00
257
P7.17 2
Skip F2 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.18
Hz
0.00
258
P7.18 2
Skip F2 High Limit
Par. P7.17
400.00
Hz
0.00
259
P7.19 2
Skip F3 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.20
Hz
0.00
260
P7.20 2
Skip F3 High Limit
Par. P7.19
400.00
Hz
P7.21 2
Prohibit Accel/Decel Ramp 0.1
P7.22 2
Power Loss Function
P7.23 2
Power Loss Time
0.3
5.0
P7.24
Currency
0
8
P7.25
Energy Cost
P7.26
Data Type
0
4
P7.27
Energy Savings Reset
0
Min.
Note
0.00
261
1.0
264
0
267
2.0
268
$
2121
0
2122
s
0
2123
0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Monthly Avg
3 = Yearly Avg
1
s
0
2124
0 = No Action
1 = Reset
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
287
0 = Freq Control
1 = Speed Control
Drive Nom VT
107
10.0
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
Table 44. Motor Control—P8
Code
Parameter
P8.1 12
Motor Control Mode
P8.2 1
Current Limit
P8.3 12
V/Hz Optimization
0
109
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.4 12
V/Hz Ratio
0
108
0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
3 = Linear + Flux Optimization
P8.5 12
Field Weakening Point
Field Weakening
Point Freq
289
P8.6 12
Voltage at FWP
10.00
200.00
%
100.00
290
P8.7 12
V/Hz Mid Frequency
0.00
Par. P8.5
Hz
V/Hz Curve
Midpoint Freq
291
P8.8 12
V/Hz Mid Voltage
0.00
100.00
%
100.00
292
P8.9 12
Zero Frequency Voltage
0.00
40.00
%
0.00
293
P8.10 2
Switching Frequency
Min Switch
Freq
Max Switch
Freq
kHz
Default Switching
Freq
288
P8.11 2
Sine Filter Enable
0
1665
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
8.00
Drive Nom
CT*2
400.00
A
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
62
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 44. Motor Control—P8, continued
Code
Parameter
P8.12 12
Min.
Max.
Overvoltage Control
P8.17 2
Frequency Ramp Out
FilterTime Constant
0
3000
P8.39 2
Start Boost Rise Time
-1
Min.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
294
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
ms
0
1585
32000
s
0
1622
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
306
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Warning: Previous Freq
3 = Warning: Preset Freq
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
0.00
331
Table 45. Protections—P9
Code
Parameter
P9.1 12
4 mA Input Fault
P9.2 12
4 mA Fault Frequency
P9.3 12
External Fault
2
307
P9.4 12
Input Phase Fault
2
332
See P9.11
P9.5 12
Uvolt Fault Response
2
330
See P9.11
P9.6 12
Output Phase Fault
2
308
See P9.11
P9.7 12
Ground Fault
2
309
See P9.11
P9.8 12
Motor Thermal Protection
2
310
See P9.11
P9.9 2
Motor Thermal F0 Current
0.0
150.0
%
40.0
311
P9.10 2
Motor Thermal Time
1
200
min
12
312
P9.11 12
Stall Protection
0
313
P9.12 2
Stall Current Limit
0.1
Active Motor
Nom I*2
A
Active Motor
Nom I*13/10
314
P9.13 2
Stall Time Limit
1.0
120.0
s
15.0
315
P9.14 2
Stall Frequency Limit
1.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
316
P9.15 12
Underload Protection
0
317
P9.16 2
Underload Fnom Torque
10.0
150.0
%
50.0
318
P9.17 2
Underload F0 Torque
5.0
150.0
%
10.0
319
P9.18 2
Underload Time Limit
2.00
600.00
s
20.00
320
P9.19 12
Thermistor Fault Response
2
333
See P9.11
P9.20 2
Line Start Lockout
2
750
0 = Disabled, No Change
1 = Enable, No Change
2 = Disabled, Changed
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.21 12
Fieldbus Fault Response
2
334
See P9.11
P9.22 12
OPTCard Fault Response
2
335
See P9.11
P9.23 12
Unit Under Temp Prot
2
1564
See P9.11
P9.24 2
Wait Time
0.10
10.00
s
0.50
321
P9.25 2
Trail Time
0.00
60.00
s
30.00
322
P9.26 2
Start Function
0
323
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
See P9.11
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
See P9.11
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
2 = Start
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
63
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 45. Protections—P9, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
P9.27 2
Undervoltage Attempts
0
P9.28 2
Overvoltage Attempts
0
P9.29 2
Overcurrent Attempts
0
P9.30 2
4 mA Fault Attempts
0
10
1
327
P9.31 2
Motor Temp Fault Attempts 0
10
1
329
P9.32 2
External Fault Attempts
0
10
0
328
P9.33 2
Underload Attempts
0
10
1
336
P9.34 12
RTC Fault
1
955
P9.35 12
PT100 Fault Response
2
337
See P9.11
P9.36 12
Replace Battery Fault
Response
1
1256
See P9.11
P9.37 12
Replace Fan Fault Response
1
1257
See P9.11
P9.38 12
IP Address Confliction Resp
1
1678
See P9.11
P9.39
Cold Weather Mode
0
2126
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
Unit
Default
ID
10
1
324
10
1
325
3
1
326
1
P9.40
Cold Weather Voltage Level 0
20
%
2
2127
P9.41
Cold Weather Time Out
10
min
3
2128
P9.42
Cold Weather Password
P9.43
Under Temp Fault Override 0
0
2130
0
See P9.11
2129
1
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
64
Note
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No
1 = Yes
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 46. PID Controller 1—P10
Code
Parameter
P10.1 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
PID1 Control Gain
0.00
200.00
%
100.00
1294
P10.2 2
PID1 Control ITime
0.00
600.00
s
1.00
1295
P10.3 2
PID1 Control DTime
0.00
100.00
s
0.00
1296
P10.4 12
PID1 Process Unit
0
1297
P10.5 2
PID1 Process Unit Min
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1298
P10.6 2
PID1 Process Unit Max
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
100.00
1300
P10.7 2
PID1 Process Unit Decimal
0
4
2
1302
P10.8 12
PID1 Error Inversion
0
1303
P10.9 2
PID1 Dead Band
0.00
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1304
P10.10 2
PID1 Dead Band Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
1306
P10.11 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1307
P10.12 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1309
P10.13 2
PID1 Ramp Time
0.00
300.00
s
0.00
1311
Note
0=%
1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = °C
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
65
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 46. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.14 12
Min.
PID1 Set Point 1 Source
P10.15 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.16 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.17 12
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep
Enable
P10.18 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
P10.19 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0
P10.20 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
P10.21 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P10.22 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Source
P10.23 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
P10.24 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1323
P10.25 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep
Enable
0
1324
P10.26 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1325
P10.27 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1326
P10.28 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1327
P10.29 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Boost
–2.0
2.0
1.0
1329
P10.30 12
PID1 Feedback Function
0
1330
P10.31 2
PID1 Feedback Gain
100.0
1331
–1000.0
Max.
Default
ID
Note
1
1312
0 = Not Used
1 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
2 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
10 = FB Data Input 4
11 = FB Data Input 5
12 = FB Data Input 6
13 = FB Data Input 7
14 = FB Data Input 8
%
0.00
1313
%
100.00
1314
0
1315
Hz
0.00
1316
3000
s
0
1317
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1318
1.0
1320
2
1321
0.00
1322
1000.0
Unit
%
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
66
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 46. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.32 12
Min.
PID1 Feedback 1 Source
P10.33 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.34 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.35 12
PID1 Feedback 2 Source
P10.36 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.37 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.38 12
PID1 Feedforward Func
P10.39 2
PID1 Feedforward Gain
P10.40 12
PID1 Feedforward 1 Source
–1000.0
Max.
1000.0
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
1332
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
%
0.00
1333
%
100.00
1334
0
1335
%
0.00
1336
%
100.00
1337
0
1338
%
100.0
1339
0
1340
P10.41 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1341
P10.42 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1342
P10.43 12
PID1 Feedforward 2 Source
0
1343
P10.44 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1344
P10.45 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1345
P10.46 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp
Enable
0
1352
P10.47 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max –200.00
P10.48 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp
Enable
P10.49 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Max –200.00
200.00
200.00
%
%
0.00
1353
0
1354
0.00
1355
See P10.32
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
See P10.40
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
67
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 47. Preset Speed—P12
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P12.1 2
Preset Speed 1
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
5.00
105
P12.2 2
Preset Speed 2
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
10.00
106
P12.3 2
Preset Speed 3
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
118
P12.4 2
Preset Speed 4
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
20.00
119
P12.5 2
Preset Speed 5
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
120
P12.6 2
Preset Speed 6
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
30.00
121
P12.7 2
Preset Speed 7
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
35.00
122
Note
Table 48. Brake—P14
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P14.1 12
DC-Brake Current
Drive Nom
CT*15/100
Drive Nom
CT*15/10
A
Drive Nom
CT*1/2
254
Note
P14.2 12
Start DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
263
P14.3 12
Stop DC-Brake Frequency
0.10
10.00
Hz
1.50
262
P14.4 12
Stop DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
255
P14.5 12
Brake Chopper
0
251
0 = Disabled
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12
Flux Brake
0
266
0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12
Flux Brake Current
Active Motor
Nom I*1/10
Par. P8.2
A
Active Motor
Nom I*1/2
265
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Table 49. Fire Mode—P15
Code
Parameter
P15.1 12
Fire Mode Function
0
535
0 = Closing Contact
1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12
Fire Mode Ref Select
Function
0
536
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P15.3 2
Fire Mode Min Frequency
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
537
P15.4 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 1
0.0
100.0
%
75.0
565
P15.5 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 2
0.0
100.0
%
100.0
564
P15.6 12
Smoke Purge Frequency
0.0
100.0
%
50.0
554
Table 50. Second Motor Parameter—P16
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P16.1 1
Motor Nom Current 2
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
A
Drive Nom CT
577
P16.2 1
Motor Nom Speed 2
300
20000
rpm
2nd Motor Nom
Speed
578
P16.3 1
Motor PF 2
0.30
1.00
0.85
579
P16.4 1
Motor Nom Volt 2
180
690
V
2nd Motor Nom V
580
P16.5 1
Motor Nom Freq 2
8.00
400.00
Hz
2nd Motor Nom Freq 581
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
68
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 51. Bypass—P17
Code
Parameter
P17.1 12
Bypass Enable
P17.2 12
Bypass Start Delay
P17.3 12
Auto Bypass
P17.4 12
Auto Bypass Delay
P17.5 12
Min.
1
Max.
ID
Note
0
1418
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5
544
542
10
543
Overcurrent Bypass Enable
0
547
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.6 12
IGBT Fault Bypass Enable
0
546
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.7 12
4 mA Fault Bypass Enable
0
548
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.8 12
Undervoltage Bypass Enable
0
545
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.9 12
Overvoltage Bypass Enable
0
549
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Unit
Default
ID
Note
32765
s
Default
0
0
32765
Unit
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 52. Multi-Pump Control—P18
Code
Parameter
P18.1 12
Min.
Number of Motors
1
5
1
342
P18.2 2
Bandwidth
0.0
100.0
%
10.0
343
P18.3 2
Bandwidth Delay
0
3600
s
10
344
P18.4 2
Interlock Enable
1
350
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.5 2
Include Freq Converter
1
346
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.6 2
Auto-Change Enable
0
345
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.7 2
Auto-Change Interval
48.0
347
P18.8 2
Auto-Change Freq Limit
P18.9 2
Auto-Change Motor Limit
P18.10 12
Damper Start
P18.11 12
Damper Time Out
1
32500
P18.12 12
Damper Delay
1
32500
0.0
Max.
3000.0
h
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
0
5
25.00
349
1
348
0
483
s
5
484
s
5
485
0 = Normal
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
69
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 53. Real Time Clock—P19
Code
Parameter
P19.1 2
Min.
Interval 1 On Time
0,0,0
491
P19.2 2
Interval 1 Off Time
0,0,0
493
P19.3 2
Interval 1 From Day
0
517
P19.4 2
Interval 1 To Day
0
518
See P19.3
P19.5 2
Interval 1 Channel
0
519
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
P19.6 2
Interval 2 On Time
0,0,0
495
P19.7 2
Interval 2 Off Time
0,0,0
497
P19.8 2
Interval 2 From Day
0
520
See P19.3
P19.9 2
Interval 2 To Day
0
521
See P19.3
P19.10 2
Interval 2 Channel
0
522
See P19.5
P19.11 2
Interval 3 On Time
0,0,0
499
P19.12 2
Interval 3 Off Time
0,0,0
501
P19.13 2
Interval 3 From Day
0
523
See P19.3
P19.14 2
Interval 3 To Day
0
524
See P19.3
P19.15 2
Interval 3 Channel
0
525
See P19.5
P19.16 2
Interval 4 On Time
0,0,0
503
P19.17 2
Interval 4 Off Time
0,0,0
505
P19.18 2
Interval 4 From Day
0
526
P19.19 2
Interval 4 To Day
0
527
See P19.3
P19.20 2
Interval 4 Channel
0
528
See P19.5
P19.21 2
Interval 5 On Time
0,0,0
507
P19.22 2
Interval 5 Off Time
0,0,0
509
P19.23 2
Interval 5 From Day
0
529
See P19.3
P19.24 2
Interval 5 To Day
0
530
See P19.3
P19.25 2
Interval 5 Channel
0
531
See P19.5
P19.26 2
Timer 1 Duration
P19.27 2
Timer 1 Channel
P19.28 2
Timer 2 Duration
P19.29 2
Timer 2 Channel
P19.30 2
Timer 3 Duration
P19.31 2
Timer 3 Channel
0
0
0
Max.
72000
72000
72000
Unit
s
s
s
Default
ID
0
511
0
532
0
513
0
533
0
515
0
534
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
70
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
See P19.3
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
See P19.27
See P19.27
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 54. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1
Code
Parameter
P20.1.1 2
P20.1.2 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
FB Data Output 1 Sel
1
1556
FB Data Output 2 Sel
2
1557
P20.1.3 2
FB Data Output 3 Sel
3
1558
P20.1.4 2
FB Data Output 4 Sel
4
1559
P20.1.5 2
FB Data Output 5 Sel
5
1560
P20.1.6 2
FB Data Output 6 Sel
6
1561
P20.1.7 2
FB Data Output 7 Sel
7
1562
P20.1.8 2
FB Data Output 8 Sel
359
1563
Default
ID
Note
0
586
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
Table 55. Modbus RTU—P20.2
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.2.1
RS485 Comm Set
P20.2.2
Slave Address
18
587
P20.2.3
Baud Rate
2
584
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
P20.2.4
Parity Type
2
585
0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
P20.2.5
Protocol Status
0
588
0 = Initial
1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6
Slave Busy
0
589
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
P20.2.7
Parity Error
0
590
P20.2.8
Slave Fault
0
591
P20.2.9
Last Fault Response
0
592
P20.2.10
Comm Timeout Modbus RTU
2000
593
1
Max.
Unit
247
ms
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
71
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 56. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2
Code
Parameter
P20.2.11
BACnet Baud Rate
P20.2.12
MAC Address
0
127
0
4194302
P20.2.13
Instance Number
P20.2.14
Comm Timeout BACnet
P20.2.15
P20.2.16
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
2
594
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
1
595
0
596
6000
598
Protocol Status
0
599
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Fault Code
0
600
0 = None
1 = Sole Master
ms
Table 57. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3
Code
Parameter
P20.3.1
IP Address Mode
Min.
P20.3.2
Active IP Address
1507
P20.3.3
Active Subnet Mask
1509
P20.3.4
Active Default Gateway
1511
P20.3.5
MAC Address
1513
P20.3.6
Static IP Address
192.168.1.254
1501
P20.3.7
Static Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
1503
P20.3.8
Static Default Gateway
192.168.1.1
1505
P20.3.9
EtherNet/IP Protocol Status
0
608
P20.3.10
Connection Limit
2
609
P20.3.11
Modbus TCP Unit ID
1
610
P20.3.12
Comm Timeout Modbus TCP
P20.3.13
P20.3.14
0
Max.
Unit
2
ms
Default
ID
Note
1
1500
0 = Static IP
1 = DHCP with AutoIP
2000
611
Protocol Status
0
612
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Slave Busy
0
613
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
Note: Codes P20.3.15–P20.3.17 are for Modbus TCP.
P20.3.15
Parity Error
0
614
P20.3.16
Slave Failure
0
615
P20.3.17
Last Fault Response
0
616
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
72
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 58. Basic Setting—P21.1
Code
Parameter
P21.1.1
Min.
Default
ID
Note
Language
0
340
0 = English
1 = English
2 = English
P21.1.2 1
Application
0
142
0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
P21.1.3
Parameter Sets
0
619
0 = No
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4
Up To Keypad
0
620
See P21.3.1
P21.1.5
Down From Keypad
0
621
0 = No
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.6
Parameter Comparison
0
623
0 = No
1 = Compare with Keypad
2 = Compare with Default
3 = Compare with Set 1
4 = Compare with Set 2
P21.1.7
Password
0
624
P21.1.8
Parameter Lock
0
625
0 = Change Enable
1 = Change Disable
P21.1.9
Multimonitor Set
0
627
See P21.1.8
P21.1.10
Default Page
0
628
0 = None
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
P21.1.11
Timeout Time
0
65535
30
629
P21.1.12
Contrast Adjust
5
18
12
630
P21.1.13
Backlight Time
0
65535
P21.1.14
Fan Control
P21.1.15
HMI ACK Timeout
200
5000
P21.1.16
HMI Retry Number
1
10
Min.
Max.
0
Max.
Unit
9999
s
min
ms
10
631
3
632
200
633
5
634
Default
ID
0 = Continuous
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp
Table 59. Version Info—P21.2
Code
Parameter
Unit
P21.2.1
Keypad Software Version
640
P21.2.2
Motor Control Software
Version
642
P21.2.3
Application Software
Version
App Firmware
Note
644
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
73
Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application
Table 60. Application Info—P21.3
Code
Parameter
P21.3.1
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Brake Chopper Stat
646
0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.3.2
Brake Resistor
647
See P21.3.1
P21.3.3
Serial Number
648
Table 61. User Info—P21.4
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P21.4.1
Real Time Clock
0.0.0.1:1:13
566
P21.4.2
Daylight Saving
0
582
P21.4.3
Total MWh Count
P21.4.4
Total Power Day Count
603
P21.4.5
Total Power Hr Count
606
P21.4.6
Trip MWh Count
P21.4.7
Clear Trip MWh Count
P21.4.8
Trip Power Day Count
P21.4.9
Trip Power Hr Count
P21.4.10
Clear Trip Power Count
Min.
Max.
Unit
Mwh
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
601
Mwh
604
0
635
0 = Not Reset
1 = Reset
636
637
0
639
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
74
Note
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P21.4.8
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Introduction
I/O Controls
The Multi-PID Application is designed to be used with up to
2 PID Control applications determined by the use of a digital
input; it is typically used with pumps and fans to maintain a
desired set-point. With PID, the frequency converter is given
a set reference from a keypad, analog inputs, or fieldbus
data-in. It also uses an analog probe that measures flow,
temperature, and pressure in the system referred to as
feedback. The frequency converter takes the feedback signal
and compares it to the set point. From there based off the
Gain, Integral time, and Derivative time, it corrects the speed
of the motor to meet the set point value and maintain it; no
additional components. Drive controlwise it provides the
ability to have 2 control and reference locations with 8 digital
inputs, 2 analog inputs, 3 relay outputs, 1 digital output, and
2 analog outputs that are programmable. Motor control is
customizable to frequency or speed control, and the V/Hz
curve can be programmable. Drive/Motor protection
selections can be programmable to defined actions. Below
is a list of additional features available in addition to the
Standard and Multi-Pump and Fan Application features that
are available in the Multi-PID Application.
●
Select the Multi-PID Application in menu P21.1.2.
Multi-PID Application includes all the functions in Multi-Pump
and Fan Application, and Additional functions:
●
The Second PID control
“Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
options are available. For use of the drives control board
inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
option card.
●
“Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
relay output or a digital output, that is assigned a parameter.
Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
The parameters of the Multi-PID Application are explained
on Page 130 of this manual, “Description of Parameters.”
The explanations are arranged according to the parameter
number.
Figure 34. PID Controller Flowchart
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
75
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Control I/O Configuration
●
●
Run 240 Vac and 24 Vdc control wiring in separate conduit
Communication wire to be shielded
Table 62. Multi-PID Application Default I/O Configuration
SW1
AI1 0–10V
AI2 SW1
AI2 SW2
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–10V
AI2 10–10V
SW2
On
Off
Res
Pin
i
76
(RS-485 matching resistor)
Signal Name Signal
Default Setting
Description
1
+10V
Ref. Output Voltage
—
10 Vdc Supply Source
2
AI1+
Analog Input 1
0–10V
Voltage Speed Reference (Programmable to 4 mA to 20 mA)
3
AI1–
Analog Input 1 Ground
—
Analog Input 1 Common (Ground)
4
AI2+
Analog Input 2
4 mA to 20 mA
Current Speed Reference (Programmable to 0–10V)
5
AI2–
Analog Input 2 Ground
—
Analog Input 2 Common (Ground)
6
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
7
DIN5
Digital Input 5
Preset Speed B0
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 1
8
DIN6
Digital Input 6
Preset Speed B1
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 2
9
DIN7
Digital Input 7
Emergency Stop (TI–)
Input forces VFD output to shut off
10
DIN8
Digital Input 8
Force Remote (TI+)
Input takes VFD from Local to Remote
11
CMB
DI5 to DI8 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
12
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
13
24V
+24 Vdc Output
—
14
DO1
Digital Output 1
Ready
Shows the drive is ready to run
15
24Vo
+24 Vdc Output
—
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
16
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
17
AO1+
Analog Output 1
Output Frequency
Shows Output frequency to motor 0–60 Hz (4 mA to 20 mA)
18
AO2+
Analog Output 2
Motor Current
Shows Motor current of motor 0–FLA (4 mA to 20 mA)
19
24Vi
+24 Vdc Input
—
External control voltage input
20
DIN1
Digital Input 1
Run Forward
Input starts drive in forward direction (start enable)
21
DIN2
Digital Input 2
Run Reverse
Input starts drive in reverse direction (start enable)
22
DIN3
Digital Input 3
External Fault
Input causes drive to fault
23
DIN4
Digital Input 4
Fault Reset
Input resets active faults
24
CMA
DI1 to DI4 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
25
A
RS-485 Signal A
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
26
B
RS-485 Signal B
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
27
R3NO
Relay 3 Normally Open
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
28
R1NC
Relay 1 Normally Closed
Run
Relay output 1 shows VFD is in a run state
29
R1CM
Relay 1 Common
30
R1NO
Relay 1 Normally Open
31
R3CM
Relay 3 Common
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
32
R2NC
Relay 2 Normally Closed
Fault
Relay output 2 shows VFD is in a fault state
33
R2CM
Relay 2 Common
34
R2NO
Relay 2 Normally Open
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Multi-PID Application—Parameters List
On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter
groups. The parameter descriptions are given on Page 130, “Description of Parameters.”
The descriptions are arranged according to the parameter number.
Column explanations:
Code = Location indication on the keypad; shows the operator the present parameter number
Parameter = Name of parameter
Min = Minimum value of parameter
Max = Maximum value of parameter
Unit = Unit of parameter value; given if available
Default = Value preset by factory
ID = ID number of the parameter
Table 63. Monitor—M
Code
Parameter
Unit
Default
ID
M1
Output Frequency
Min.
Max.
Hz
0.00
1
M2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
M3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
M4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
M5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
M6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
M7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
M8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
M9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
M10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
M12
Analog Input 1
Varies
0.00
10
M13
Analog Input 2
Varies
0.00
11
M14
Analog Output 1
Varies
0.00
25
M15
Analog Output 2
Varies
0.00
575
M16
DI1, DI2, DI3
0
12
Note
M17
DI4, DI5, DI6
0
13
M18
DI7, DI8
0
576
M19
DO1
0
14
M20
RO1, RO2, RO3
0
557
M21
TC1, TC2, TC3
0
558
M22
Interval 1
0
559
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
M23
Interval 2
0
560
See M22
M24
Interval 3
0
561
See M22
M25
Interval 4
0
562
See M22
M26
Interval 5
0
563
See M22
M27
Timer 1
s
0
569
M28
Timer 2
s
0
571
M29
Timer 3
s
0
573
M30
PID1 Set Point
Varies
0.00
16
M31
PID1 Feedback
Varies
0.00
18
M32
PID1 Error Value
Varies
0.00
20
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
77
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 63. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
M33
PID1 Output
M34
PID1 Status
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
%
0.00
22
0
23
M35
PID2 Set Point
Varies
0.00
32
M36
PID2 Feedback
Varies
0.00
34
M37
PID2 Error Value
Varies
0.00
36
M38
PID2 Output
%
0.00
38
M39
PID2 Status
0
39
M40
Running Motors
0
26
M41
PT100 Temperature
1000.0
27
°C
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
78
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Stopped
1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
See M34
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 63. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
M42
Last Active Fault
M43
RTC Battery Status
M44
Instance Motor Power
kW
M45
Energy Savings
Varies
M46
Multi-Monitoring
Default
ID
Note
0
28
0 = Null
1 = Over Current
2 = Over Voltage
3 = Earth Fault
4 = Charging Switch
5 = Emergency Stop
6 = Saturation Trip
7 = System Fault
8 = Undervoltage
9 = Input Phase Superv
10 = Output Phase Superv
11 = Brake Chopper Superv
12 = Drive Under Temp
13 = Drive Over Temp
14 = Motor Stalled
15 = Motor Over Temp
16 = Motor Under Load
17 = IP Address Conflict
18 = Power Board EEPROM Fault
19 = FRAM Fault
20 = S-Flash Fault
21 = MCU Watchdog Fault
22 = Start-up Prevent
23 = Thermistor Fault
24 = Fan Cooling
25 = Compatibility Fault
26 = Device Change
27 = Device Added
28 = Device Removed
29 = Device Unknown
30 = IGBT Over Temp
31 = Encoder Fault
32 = AI < 4 mA (4to20 mA)
33 = External Fault
34 = Keypad Comm Fault
35 = Fieldbus Fault
36 = Option Card Fault
37 = Bypass Overload
38 = Realtime Clock Fault
39 = PT100 Fault
40 = Motor ID Fault
41 = Current Measure Fault
42 = Power Wiring Error
43 = Control Board Overtemp
44 = Internal Control Supply
45 = Speed Search Fault
46 = Current Unbalance
47 = Replace Battery
48 = Replace Fan
49 = Safety Torque Off
50 = Current Limit Controller
51 = Over Voltage Controller
583
0 = Not Installed
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
0.0
1686
0, 1, 2
30
2119
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
79
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 64. Operate Mode—O
Code
Parameter
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
O10
R12 2
Output Frequency
Freq Reference
Motor Speed
Motor Current
Motor Torque
Motor Power
Motor Voltage
DC-link Voltage
Unit Temperature
Motor Temperature
Keypad Reference
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
Hz
rpm
A
%
%
V
V
°C
%
Hz
0.00
0.00
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.00
1
24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
141
Note
Table 65. Basic Parameters—P1
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P1.1 2
P1.2 2
P1.3 2
P1.4 2
P1.5 1
Min Frequency
Max Frequency
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Motor Nom Current
0.00
Max Freq
3.0
3.0
Drive Nom CT
101
102
103
104
486
Motor Nom Speed
Motor PF
Motor Nom Voltage
Motor Nom Frequency
Local/Remote Select
Par. P1.2
400.00
3000.0
3000.0
Drive Nom
CT*2
20000
1.00
690
400.00
Hz
Hz
s
s
A
P1.6 1
P1.7 1
P1.8 1
P1.9 1
P1.10 2
0.00
Par. P1.1
0.1
0.1
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
300
0.30
180
8.00
rpm
Motor Nom Speed
0.85
Motor Nom Volt
Motor Nom Freq
0
489
490
487
488
140
P1.11 2
Remote1 Control Place
0
135
P1.12
Local Control Place
0
1695
P1.13 12
Local Reference
6
136
P1.14 12
P1.15 1
Remote1 Reference
Reverse Enable
1
1
137
1679
V
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
80
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Hold Last
1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
0 = I/O Terminal
1 = Fieldbus
0 = Keypad
1 = I/O Terminal
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1 –AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = MIN(AI1,AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
17 = PID1 Control
See P1.12
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 66. Analog Input—P2
Code
Parameter
P2.1
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
AI1 Mode
1
222
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P2.2 2
AI1 Signal Range
0
175
0 = 0–100%
1 = 20–100%
2 = Customized
P2.3 2
AI1 Custom Min
P2.4 2
P2.5 2
P2.6 2
AI1 Signal Invert
P2.7 2
AI1 Joystick Hyst
0.00
20.00
P2.8 2
AI1 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
P2.9 2
AI1 Sleep Delay
0.00
P2.10 2
AI1 Joystick Offset
–50.00
P2.11
AI2 Mode
P2.12 2
AI2 Signal Range
P2.13 2
AI2 Custom Min
0.00
Par. P2.14
%
P2.14 2
AI2 Custom Max
Par. P2.13
100.00
%
100.00
185
P2.15 2
AI2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
182
P2.16 2
AI2 Signal Invert
P2.17 2
AI2 Joystick Hyst
0.00
20.00
P2.18 2
AI2 Sleep Limit
0.00
P2.19 2
AI2 Sleep Delay
P2.20 2
AI2 Joystick Offset
P2.21 2
P2.22 2
0.00
Par. P2.4
%
0.00
176
AI1 Custom Max
Par. P2.3
100.00
%
100.00
177
AI1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
174
0
181
%
0.00
178
%
0.00
179
320.00
s
0.00
180
50.00
%
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
0.00
133
0
223
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
2 = –10 to +10V
1
183
See P2.2
0.00
184
0
189
%
0.00
186
100.00
%
0.00
187
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
188
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
134
AI Ref Scale Min Value
0.00
Par. P2.22
Hz
0.00
144
AI Ref Scale Max Value
Par. P2.21
400.00
Hz
0.00
145
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
81
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 67. Digital Input—P3
Code
Parameter
P3.1 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Start/Stop Logic
0
143
0 = Forward–Reverse
1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
3 = Start Pulse–Stop Pulse
P3.2 2
Start Signal 1
2
190
0 = DigIN:ForceOpen
1 = DigIN:ForceClose
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
P3.3 2
Start Signal 2
3
191
See P3.2
P3.4 12
Thermistor Input Select
0
881
0 = Digital Input
1 = Thermistor Input
P3.5 2
Reverse
0
198
See P3.2
P3.6 2
Ext. Fault Close
4
192
See P3.2
P3.7 2
Ext. Fault Open
1
193
See P3.2
P3.8 2
Fault Reset
5
200
See P3.2
P3.9 2
Run Enable
1
194
See P3.2
P3.10 2
Preset Speed B0
6
205
See P3.2
P3.11 2
Preset Speed B1
7
206
See P3.2
P3.12 2
Preset Speed B2
0
207
See P3.2
P3.13 2
PID1 Control Enable
0
550
See P3.2
P3.14 2
PID2 Control Enable
0
553
See P3.2
P3.15 2
Accel/Decel Time Set
0
195
See P3.2
P3.16 2
Accel/Decel Prohibit
0
201
See P3.2
P3.17 2
No Access To Param
0
215
See P3.2
P3.21 2
Remote Control
9
196
See P3.2
P3.22 2
Local Control
0
197
See P3.2
P3.23 2
Remote1/2 Select
0
209
See P3.2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
82
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 67. Digital Input—P3, continued
Code
Parameter
P3.24 2
P3.25 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Second Motor Para Select
0
217
See P3.2
Bypass Start
0
218
See P3.2
P3.26 2
DC Brake Enable
0
202
See P3.2
P3.27 2
Smoke Mode
0
219
See P3.2
P3.28 2
Fire Mode
0
220
See P3.2
P3.29 2
Fire Mode Ref Select
0
221
See P3.2
P3.30 2
PID1 Set Point Select
0
351
See P3.2
P3.31 2
PID2 Set Point Select
0
352
See P3.2
P3.32 2
Jog Enable
0
199
See P3.2
P3.33 2
Start Timer 1
0
224
See P3.2
P3.34 2
Start Timer 2
0
225
See P3.2
P3.35 2
Start Timer 3
0
226
See P3.2
P3.36 2
AI Ref Source Select
0
208
See P3.2
P3.37 2
Motor Interlock 1
0
210
See P3.2
P3.38 2
Motor Interlock 2
0
211
See P3.2
P3.39 2
Motor Interlock 3
0
212
See P3.2
P3.40 2
Motor Interlock 4
0
213
See P3.2
P3.41 2
Motor Interlock 5
0
214
See P3.2
P3.42 2
Emergency Stop
8
747
See P3.2
P3.43 2
Bypass Overload
0
1246
See P3.2
P3.44
Fire Mode Reverse
0
2118
See P3.2
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
83
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 68. Analog Output—P4
Code
Parameter
P4.1 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
AO1 Mode
0
227
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P4.2 2
AO1 Function
1
146
0 = Not Used
1 = Output Frequency
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
5 = Motor Torque (0–Nom)
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
10 = PID1 Feedback 1
11 = PID1 Feedback 2
12 = PID1 Control Error Value
13 = PID1 Control Output
14 = PID2 Setpoint
15 = PID2 Feedback 1
16 = PID2 Feedback 2
17 = PID2 Control Error Value
18 = PID2 Control Output
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
21 = Output Freq (–2 to +2N)
22 = Motor Torque (–2 to +2N)
23 = Motor Power (–2 to +2N)
24 = PT100 Temperature
P4.3 2
AO1 Minimum
1
149
0 = 0V / 0 mA
1 = 2V / 4 mA
P4.4 2
AO1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
147
P4.5 2
AO1 Scale
10
1000
%
100
150
0
148
–100.00
100.00
%
0.00
173
P4.6 2
AO1 Inversion
P4.7 2
AO1 Offset
P4.8 2
AO2 Mode
0
228
P4.9 2
AO2 Function
4
229
See P4.2
P4.10 2
AO2 Minimum
1
232
See P4.3
P4.11 2
AO2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
230
P4.12 2
AO2 Scale
10
1000
%
P4.13 2
AO2 Inversion
P4.14 2
AO2 Offset
–100.00
100.00
%
100
233
0
231
0.00
234
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
84
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P2.6
See P4.1
See P2.6
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 69. Digital Output—P5
Code
Parameter
P5.1 2
Min.
Default
ID
Note
DO1 Function
1
151
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
10 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
11 = PID1 Superv
12 = PID2 Superv
13 = Overheat Warning
14 = Overcurrent Regular
15 = Overvoltage Regular
16 = Undervoltage Regular
17 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
20 = Torq Limit Superv
21 = Ref Limit Superv
22 = Control from I/O
23 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
24 = Thermistor Fault Output
25 = Fire Mode
26 = Bypass Run
27 = Ext Fault/Warning
28 = Remote Control
29 = Jog Speed Select
30 = Motor Therm Protection
31 = FB Digital Input 1
32 = FB Digital Input 2
33 = FB Digital Input 3
34 = FB Digital Input 4
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
40 = Power Limit Superv
41 = Temp Limit Superv
42 = Analog Input Superv
43 = Motor 1 Control
44 = Motor 2 Control
45 = Motor 3 Control
46 = Motor 4 Control
47 = Motor 5 Control
49 = PID1 Sleep
50 = PID2 Sleep
P5.2 2
RO1 Function
2
152
See P5.1
P5.3 2
RO2 Function
3
153
See P5.1
P5.4 2
RO3 Function
7
538
See P5.1
P5.5 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv
0
154
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
P5.6 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv Val
0.00
155
P5.7 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv
0
157
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
85
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 69. Digital Output—P5, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
P5.8 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv Val
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
P5.9 2
Torque Limit Supv
P5.10 2
Torque Limit Supv Val
P5.11 2
Ref Limit Supv
P5.12 2
Ref Limit Supv Val
P5.15 2
Temp Limit Supv
P5.16 2
Temp Limit Supv Val
P5.17 2
Power Limit Supv
P5.18 2
Power Limit Supv Val
P5.19 2
AI Supv Select
–300.0
300.0
%
Default
ID
0.00
158
0
159
100.0
160
0
161
Note
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
162
0
165
–10.0
75.0
°C
40.0
166
0
167
0.0
200.0
%
0.0
168
0
170
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
See P5.11
P5.20 2
AI Limit Supv
P5.21 2
AI Limit Supv Val
P5.22 2
PID1 Superv Enable
P5.23 2
PID1 Superv Upper Limit
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
P5.24 2
PID1 Superv Lower Limit
Par. P10.5
P5.25 2
PID1 Superv Delay
0
P5.26 2
PID2 Superv Enable
P5.27 2
PID2 Superv Upper Limit
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1409
P5.28 2
PID2 Superv Lower Limit
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1411
P5.29 2
PID2 Superv Delay
0
3000
s
0
1413
P5.30
RO1 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2111
P5.31
RO1 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2112
P5.32
RO2 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2113
P5.33
RO2 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2114
P5.34
RO3 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2115
P5.35
RO3 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2116
P5.36
RO3 Reverse
0
1
0
2117
Min.
Max.
0.00
0
171
0.00
172
0
1346
Varies
0.00
1347
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1349
3000
s
0
1351
0
1408
100.00
%
See P5.11
See P5.11
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
Table 70. Drive Control—P7
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P7.1 2
Remote 2 Control Place
1
138
See P1.11
P7.2 12
Remote 2 Reference
7
139
See P1.12
P7.3 2
Keypad Reference
0.00
141
P7.4 2
Keypad Direction
0
116
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
P7.5 2
Keypad Stop
1
114
0 = Enabled-Keypad Operation
1 = Always Enabled
P7.6 2
Jog Reference
0.00
117
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
86
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 70. Drive Control—P7, continued
Code
Parameter
P7.9 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Start Mode
0
252
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
P7.10 2
Stop Mode
1
253
0 = Coasting
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2
Ramp 1 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
247
P7.12 2
Ramp 2 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
248
P7.13 2
Accel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
249
P7.14 2
Decel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
250
P7.15 2
Skip F1 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.16
Hz
0.00
256
P7.16 2
Skip F1 High Limit
Par. P7.15
400.00
Hz
0.00
257
P7.17 2
Skip F2 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.18
Hz
0.00
258
P7.18 2
Skip F2 High Limit
Par. P7.17
400.00
Hz
0.00
259
P7.19 2
Skip F3 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.20
Hz
0.00
260
P7.20 2
Skip F3 High Limit
Par. P7.19
400.00
Hz
P7.21 2
Prohibit Accel/Decel Ramp 0.1
P7.22 2
Power Loss Function
P7.23 2
Power Loss Time
0.3
5.0
P7.24
Currency
0
8
P7.25
Energy Cost
P7.26
Data Type
0
4
P7.27
Energy Savings Reset
0
Min.
0.00
261
1.0
264
0
267
2.0
268
$
2121
0
2122
s
0
2123
0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Monthly Avg
3 = Yearly Avg
1
s
0
2124
0 = No Action
1 = Reset
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
287
0 = Freq Control
1 = Speed Control
Drive Nom CT
107
10.0
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
Table 71. Motor Control—P8
Code
Parameter
P8.1 12
Motor Control Mode
P8.2 1
Current Limit
P8.3 12
V/Hz Optimization
0
109
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.4 12
V/Hz Ratio
0
108
0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
3 = Linear + Flux Optimization
P8.5 12
Field Weakening Point
8.00
400.00
Hz
Field Weakening
Point Freq
289
P8.6 12
Voltage at FWP
10.00
200.00
%
100.00
290
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
87
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 71. Motor Control—P8, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P8.7 12
V/Hz Mid Frequency
0.00
Par. P8.5
Hz
V/Hz Curve
Midpoint Freq
291
P8.8 12
V/Hz Mid Voltage
0.00
100.00
%
100.00
292
P8.9 12
Zero Frequency Voltage
0.00
40.00
%
P8.10 2
Switching Frequency
Min Switching
Freq
Max Switching kHz
Freq
P8.11 2
Note
0.00
293
Default Switching
Freq
288
Sine Filter Enable
0
1665
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.12 12
Overvoltage Control
1
294
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.17 2
Frequency Ramp Out
FilterTime Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1585
P8.39 2
Start Boost Rise Time
-1
32000
s
0
1622
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
306
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Warning: Previous Freq
3 = Warning: Preset Freq
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
Table 72. Protections—P9
Code
Parameter
P9.1 12
4 mA Input Fault
P9.2 12
4 mA Fault Frequency
0.00
331
P9.3 12
External Fault
2
307
P9.4 12
Input Phase Fault
2
332
See P9.11
P9.5 12
Uvolt Fault Response
2
330
See P9.11
P9.6 12
Output Phase Fault
2
308
See P9.11
P9.7 12
Ground Fault
2
309
See P9.11
P9.8 12
Motor Thermal Protection
2
310
See P9.11
P9.9 2
Motor Thermal F0 Current
0.0
150.0
%
40.0
311
P9.10 2
Motor Thermal Time
1
200
min
12
312
P9.11 12
Stall Protection
0
313
P9.12 2
Stall Current Limit
0.1
Active Motor
Nom I*2
A
Active Motor Nom
I*13/10
314
P9.13 2
Stall Time Limit
1.0
120.0
s
15.0
315
P9.14 2
Stall Frequency Limit
1.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
316
P9.15 12
Underload Protection
0
317
P9.16 2
Underload Fnom Torque
10.0
150.0
%
50.0
318
P9.17 2
Underload F0 Torque
5.0
150.0
%
10.0
319
P9.18 2
Underload Time Limit
2.00
600.00
s
20.00
320
P9.19 12
Thermistor Fault Response
2
333
See P9.11
P9.20 2
Line Start Lockout
2
750
0 = Disabled, No Change
1 = Enable, No Change
2 = Disabled, Changed
3 = Enable, Changed
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
88
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P9.11
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
See P9.11
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 72. Protections—P9, continued
Code
Parameter
P9.21 12
Min.
Fieldbus Fault Response
2
334
See P9.11
P9.22 12
OPTCard Fault Response
2
335
See P9.11
P9.23 12
Unit Under Temp Prot
2
1564
See P9.11
P9.24 2
Wait Time
0.10
10.00
s
0.50
321
P9.25 2
Trail Time
0.00
60.00
s
30.00
322
P9.26 2
Start Function
0
323
P9.27 2
Undervoltage Attempts
0
10
1
324
P9.28 2
Overvoltage Attempts
0
10
1
325
P9.29 2
Overcurrent Attempts
0
3
1
326
P9.30 2
4 mA Fault Attempts
0
10
1
327
P9.31 2
Motor Temp Fault Attempts 0
10
1
329
P9.32 2
External Fault Attempts
0
10
0
328
P9.33 2
Underload Attempts
0
10
1
336
P9.34 12
RTC Fault
1
955
See P9.11
P9.35 12
PT100 Fault Response
2
337
See P9.11
P9.36 12
Replace Battery Fault
Response
1
1256
See P9.11
P9.37 12
Replace Fan Fault Response
1
1257
See P9.11
P9.38 12
IP Address Confliction Resp
1
1678
See P9.11
P9.39
Cold Weather Mode
0
2126
0 = No
1 = Yes
P9.40
Cold Weather Voltage Level 0
20
%
2
2127
P9.41
Cold Weather Time Out
10
min
3
P9.42
Cold Weather Password
P9.43
Under Temp Fault Override 0
0
0
Max.
Unit
1
Default
ID
Note
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
2 = Start
2128
2129
1
0
2130
0 = No
1 = Yes
Note
Table 73. PID Controller 1—P10
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P10.1 2
PID1 Control Gain
0.00
200.00
%
100.00
1294
P10.2 2
PID1 Control ITime
0.00
600.00
s
1.00
1295
P10.3 2
PID1 Control DTime
0.00
100.00
s
0.00
1296
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
89
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 73. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.4 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
PID1 Process Unit
0
1297
0=%
1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = e&
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
P10.5 2
PID1 Process Unit Min
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1298
P10.6 2
PID1 Process Unit Max
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
100.00
1300
P10.7 2
PID1 Process Unit Decimal
0
4
2
1302
P10.8 12
PID1 Error Inversion
0
1303
P10.9 2
PID1 Dead Band
0.00
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1304
P10.10 2
PID1 Dead Band Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
1306
P10.11 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1307
P10.12 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1309
P10.13 2
PID1 Ramp Time
0.00
300.00
s
0.00
1311
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
90
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P2.6
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 73. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.14 12
Min.
PID1 Set Point 1 Source
P10.15 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.16 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.17 12
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep
Enable
P10.18 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1316
P10.19 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1317
P10.20 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1318
P10.21 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P10.22 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Source
P10.23 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.24 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.25 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep
Enable
P10.26 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
P10.27 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 0
P10.28 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
P10.29 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P10.30 12
PID1 Feedback Function
P10.31 2
PID1 Feedback Gain
–1000.0
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
1312
0 = Not Used
1 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
2 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
10 = FB Data Input 4
11 = FB Data Input 5
12 = FB Data Input 6
13 = FB Data Input 7
14 = FB Data Input 8
%
0.00
1313
%
100.00
1314
0
1315
1.0
1320
2
1321
%
0.00
1322
%
100.00
1323
0
1324
Hz
0.00
1325
3000
s
0
1326
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1327
1.0
1329
0
1330
100.0
1331
1000.0
%
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
91
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 73. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.32 12
Min.
Max.
PID1 Feedback 1 Source
P10.33 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1333
P10.34 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1334
P10.35 12
PID1 Feedback 2 Source
0
1335
P10.36 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1336
P10.37 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1337
P10.38 12
PID1 Feedforward Func
0
1338
P10.39 2
PID1 Feedforward Gain
P10.40 12
PID1 Feedforward 1 Source
P10.41 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.42 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.43 12
PID1 Feedforward 2 Source
P10.44 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.45 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.46 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp
Enable
P10.47 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max –200.00
P10.48 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp
Enable
P10.49 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Max –200.00
–1000.0
1000.0
200.00
200.00
Unit
%
Default
ID
Note
1
1332
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
100.0
1339
0
1340
%
0.00
1341
%
100.00
1342
0
1343
%
0.00
1344
%
100.00
1345
0
1352
0.00
1353
0
1354
0.00
1355
%
%
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
92
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P10.32
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
See P10.40
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 74. PID Controller 2—P11
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P11.1 2
PID2 Control Gain
0.00
200.00
%
100.00
1356
P11.2 2
PID2 Control I Time
0.00
600.00
s
1.00
1357
P11.3 2
PID2 Control D Time
0.00
100.00
s
0.00
1358
P11.4 12
PID2 Process Unit
0
1359
P11.5 2
PID2 Process Unit Min
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1360
P11.6 2
PID2 Process Unit Max
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
100.00
1362
P11.7 2
PID2 Process Unit Decimal
0
4
2
1364
P11.8 12
PID2 Error Inversion
P11.9 2
PID2 Dead Band
0.00
99999.99
P11.10 2
PID2 Dead Band Delay
0.00
P11.11 2
PID2 Keypad Set Point 1
P11.12 2
PID2 Keypad Set Point 2
P11.13 2
PID2 Ramp Time
P11.14 12
PID2 Set Point 1 Source
P11.15 2
0
1365
Varies
0.00
1366
320.00
s
0.00
1368
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1369
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1371
0.00
300.00
s
0.00
1373
1
1374
PID2 Set Point 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1375
P11.16 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1376
P11.17 12
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep
Enable
0
1377
P11.18 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1378
P11.19 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1379
P11.20 2
PID2 Set Point 1 WakeUp
Level
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1380
P11.21 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P11.22 12
PID2 Set Point 2 Source
P11.23 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1384
P11.24 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1385
P11.25 12
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep
Enable
0
1386
P11.26 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1387
P11.27 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1388
P11.28 2
PID2 Set Point 2 WakeUp
Level
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1389
P11.29 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Boost
–2.0
2.0
1.0
1391
P11.30 12
PID2 Feedback Func
P11.31 2
PID2 Feedback Gain
P11.32 12
PID2 Feedback 1 Source
P11.33 2
1.0
1382
2
1383
0
1392
1393
–1000.0
1000.0
%
100.0
1
1394
PID2 Feedback 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1395
P11.34 2
PID2 Feedback 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1396
P11.35 12
PID2 Feedback 2 Source
0
1397
P11.36 2
PID2 Feedback 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1398
P11.37 2
PID2 Feedback 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1399
P11.38 12
PID2 Feedforward Func
0
1400
P11.39 2
PID2 Feedforward Gain
P11.40 12
PID2 Feedforward 1 Source
P11.41 2
PID2 Feedforward 1 Min
–1000.0
–200.00
1000.0
200.00
%
%
100.0
1401
0
1402
0.00
1403
Note
See P10.4
See P2.6
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.30
See P10.32
See P10.32
See P10.38
See P10.40
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
93
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 74. PID Controller 2—P11, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P11.42 2
PID2 Feedforward 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1404
P11.43 12
PID2 Feedforward 2 Source
P11.44 2
PID2 Feedforward 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P11.45 2
PID2 Feedforward 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P11.46 2
PID2 Set Point1 Comp
Enable
P11.47 2
PID2 Set Point1 Comp Max –200.00
P11.48 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp
Enable
P11.49 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Max –200.00
200.00
200.00
0
1405
%
0.00
1406
%
100.00
1407
0
1414
%
%
0.00
1415
0
1416
0.00
1417
Note
See P10.40
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 75. Preset Speed—P12
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P12.1 2
Preset Speed 1
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
5.00
105
P12.2 2
Preset Speed 2
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
10.00
106
P12.3 2
Preset Speed 3
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
118
P12.4 2
Preset Speed 4
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
20.00
119
P12.5 2
Preset Speed 5
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
120
P12.6 2
Preset Speed 6
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
30.00
121
P12.7 2
Preset Speed 7
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
35.00
122
Note
Table 76. Brake—P14
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P14.1 12
DC-Brake Current
Drive Nom
CT*15/100
Drive Nom
CT*15/10
A
Drive Nom CT*1/2
254
P14.2 12
Start DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
263
P14.3 12
Stop DC-Brake Frequency
0.10
10.00
Hz
1.50
262
P14.4 12
Stop DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
255
P14.5 12
Brake Chopper
0
251
0 = Disabled
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12
Flux Brake
0
266
0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12
Flux Brake Current
Active Motor Nom
I*1/2
265
Active Motor
Nom I*1/10
Par. P8.2
A
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
94
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 77. Fire Mode—P15
Code
Parameter
P15.1 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Fire Mode Function
0
535
0 = Closing Contact
1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12
Fire Mode Ref Select
Function
0
536
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P15.3 2
Fire Mode Min Frequency
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
537
P15.4 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 1
0.0
100.0
%
75.0
565
P15.5 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 2
0.0
100.0
%
100.0
564
P15.6 12
Smoke Purge Frequency
0.0
100.0
%
50.0
554
Table 78. Second Motor Parameter—P16
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P16.1 1
Note
Motor Nom Current 2
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Drive Nom CT
577
P16.2 1
Motor Nom Speed 2
300
20000
rpm
2nd Motor Nom
Speed
578
P16.3 1
Motor PF 2
0.30
1.00
0.85
579
P16.4 1
Motor Nom Volt 2
180
690
V
2nd Motor Nom Volt 580
P16.5 1
Motor Nom Freq 2
8.00
400.00
Hz
2nd Motor Nom Freq 581
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
1418
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5
544
0
542
10
543
Table 79. Bypass—P17
Code
Parameter
P17.1 12
Bypass Enable
P17.2 12
Bypass Start Delay
P17.3 12
Auto Bypass
P17.4 12
Auto Bypass Delay
P17.5 12
Overcurrent Bypass Enable
0
547
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.6 12
IGBT Fault Bypass Enable
0
546
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.7 12
4 mA Fault Bypass Enable
0
548
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.8 12
Undervoltage Bypass Enable
0
545
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.9 12
Overvoltage Bypass Enable
0
549
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
0
32765
32765
s
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 80. Multi-Pump Control—P18
Code
Parameter
P18.1 12
Min.
Max.
Number of Motors
1
5
1
342
P18.2 2
Bandwidth
0.0
100.0
%
10.0
343
P18.3 2
Bandwidth Delay
0
3600
s
10
344
P18.4 2
Interlock Enable
1
350
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.5 2
Include Freq Converter
1
346
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
95
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 80. Multi-Pump Control—P18, continued
Code
Parameter
P18.6 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Auto-Change Enable
0
345
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.7 2
Auto-Change Interval
0.0
3000.0
h
48.0
347
P18.8 2
Auto-Change Freq Limit
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
349
P18.9 2
Auto-Change Motor Limit
0
5
1
348
P18.10 12
Damper Start
0
483
P18.11 12
Damper Time Out
1
32500
s
5
484
P18.12 12
Damper Delay
1
32500
s
5
485
Min.
Max.
Unit
0 = Normal
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
Table 81. Real Time Clock—P19
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P19.1 2
Interval 1 On Time
0,0,0
491
Note
P19.2 2
Interval 1 Off Time
0,0,0
493
P19.3 2
Interval 1 From Day
0
517
P19.4 2
Interval 1 To Day
0
518
See P19.3
P19.5 2
Interval 1 Channel
0
519
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
P19.6 2
Interval 2 On Time
0,0,0
495
P19.7 2
Interval 2 Off Time
0,0,0
497
P19.8 2
Interval 2 From Day
0
520
See P19.3
P19.9 2
Interval 2 To Day
0
521
See P19.3
P19.10 2
Interval 2 Channel
0
522
See P19.5
P19.11 2
Interval 3 On Time
0,0,0
499
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
P19.12 2
Interval 3 Off Time
0,0,0
501
P19.13 2
Interval 3 From Day
0
523
P19.14 2
Interval 3 To Day
0
524
See P19.3
P19.15 2
Interval 3 Channel
0
525
See P19.5
P19.16 2
Interval 4 On Time
0,0,0
503
P19.17 2
Interval 4 Off Time
0,0,0
505
P19.18 2
Interval 4 From Day
0
526
See P19.3
P19.19 2
Interval 4 To Day
0
527
See P19.3
P19.20 2
Interval 4 Channel
0
528
See P19.5
P19.21 2
Interval 5 On Time
0,0,0
507
P19.22 2
Interval 5 Off Time
0,0,0
509
P19.23 2
Interval 5 From Day
0
529
See P19.3
P19.24 2
Interval 5 To Day
0
530
See P19.3
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
96
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P19.3
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 81. Real Time Clock—P19, continued
Code
Parameter
P19.25 2
Interval 5 Channel
P19.26 2
Timer 1 Duration
P19.27 2
Timer 1 Channel
P19.28 2
Timer 2 Duration
P19.29 2
Timer 2 Channel
P19.30 2
Timer 3 Duration
P19.31 2
Timer 3 Channel
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
0
72000
s
0
532
0
513
0
0
72000
72000
s
s
ID
Note
0
531
See P19.5
0
511
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
0
533
0
515
See P19.27
0
534
See P19.27
Note
Table 82. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P20.1.1 2
FB Data Output 1 Sel
Min.
Max.
Unit
1
1556
P20.1.2 2
FB Data Output 2 Sel
2
1557
P20.1.3 2
FB Data Output 3 Sel
3
1558
P20.1.4 2
FB Data Output 4 Sel
4
1559
P20.1.5 2
FB Data Output 5 Sel
5
1560
P20.1.6 2
FB Data Output 6 Sel
6
1561
P20.1.7 2
FB Data Output 7 Sel
7
1562
P20.1.8 2
FB Data Output 8 Sel
359
1563
Default
ID
Note
0
586
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
18
587
Table 83. Modbus RTU—P20.2
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.2.1
RS485 Comm Set
P20.2.2
Slave Address
P20.2.3
Baud Rate
2
584
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
P20.2.4
Parity Type
2
585
0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
P20.2.5
Protocol Status
0
588
0 = Initial
1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6
Slave Busy
0
589
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
P20.2.7
Parity Error
0
590
P20.2.8
Slave Fault
0
591
P20.2.9
Last Fault Response
0
592
P20.2.10
Comm Timeout Modbus RTU
2000
593
1
Max.
Unit
247
ms
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
97
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 84. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2
Code
Parameter
P20.2.11
BACnet Baud Rate
P20.2.12
MAC Address
0
127
0
4194302
P20.2.13
Instance Number
P20.2.14
Comm Timeout BACnet
P20.2.15
P20.2.16
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
2
594
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
1
595
0
596
6000
598
Protocol Status
0
599
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Fault Code
0
600
0 = None
1 = Sole Master
ms
Table 85. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3
Code
Parameter
P20.3.1
IP Address Mode
Min.
P20.3.2
Active IP Address
1507
P20.3.3
Active Subnet Mask
1509
P20.3.4
Active Default Gateway
1511
P20.3.5
MAC Address
1513
P20.3.6
Static IP Address
192.168.1.254
1501
P20.3.7
Static Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
1503
P20.3.8
Static Default Gateway
192.168.1.1
1505
P20.3.9
EtherNet/IP Protocol Status
0
608
P20.3.10
Connection Limit
2
609
P20.3.11
Modbus TCP Unit ID
1
610
P20.3.12
Comm Timeout Modbus TCP
P20.3.13
P20.3.14
0
Max.
Unit
2
ms
Default
ID
Note
1
1500
0 = Static IP
1 = DHCP with AutoIP
2000
611
Protocol Status
0
612
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Slave Busy
0
613
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
Note: Codes P20.3.15–P20.3.17 are for Modbus TCP.
P20.3.15
Parity Error
0
614
P20.3.16
Slave Failure
0
615
P20.3.17
Last Fault Response
0
616
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
98
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 86. Basic Setting—P21.1
Code
Parameter
P21.1.1
Min.
Default
ID
Note
Language
0
340
0 = English
1 = English
2 = English
P21.1.2 1
Application
0
142
0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
P21.1.3
Parameter Sets
0
619
0 = No
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4
Up To Keypad
0
620
See P21.3.1
P21.1.5
Down From Keypad
0
621
0 = No
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.6
Parameter Comparison
0
623
0 = No
1 = Compare with Keypad
2 = Compare with Default
3 = Compare with Set 1
4 = Compare with Set 2
P21.1.7
Password
0
624
P21.1.8
Parameter Lock
0
625
0 = Change Enable
1 = Change Disable
P21.1.9
Multimonitor Set
0
627
See P21.1.8
P21.1.10
Default Page
0
628
0 = None
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
P21.1.11
Timeout Time
0
65535
30
629
P21.1.12
Contrast Adjust
5
18
12
630
P21.1.13
Backlight Time
0
65535
P21.1.14
Fan Control
P21.1.15
HMI ACK Timeout
200
5000
P21.1.16
HMI Retry Number
1
10
Min.
Max.
0
Max.
Unit
9999
s
min
ms
10
631
3
632
200
633
5
634
Default
ID
0 = Continuous
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp
Table 87. Version Info—P21.2
Code
Parameter
Unit
P21.2.1
Keypad Software Version
640
P21.2.2
Motor Control Software
Version
642
P21.2.3
Application Software
Version
App Firmware
Note
644
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
99
Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Table 88. Application Info—P21.3
Code
Parameter
P21.3.1
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Brake Chopper Stat
646
0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.3.2
Brake Resistor
647
See P21.3.1
P21.3.3
Serial Number
648
Table 89. User Info—P21.4
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P21.4.1
Real Time Clock
0:0.0.1:1:13
566
P21.4.2
Daylight Saving
0
582
P21.4.3
Total MWh Count
P21.4.4
Total Power Day Count
603
P21.4.5
Total Power Hr Count
606
P21.4.6
Trip MWh Count
P21.4.7
Clear Trip MWh Count
P21.4.8
Trip Power Day Count
P21.4.9
Trip Power Hr Count
P21.4.10
Clear Trip Power Count
Min.
Max.
Unit
Mwh
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
601
Mwh
604
0
635
0 = Not Reset
1 = Reset
636
637
0
639
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
100
Note
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P21.4.8
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Introduction
●
The Multi-Purpose Application is designed for a large set of
applications with the ability to have advanced motor control
systems. It takes the same functions provided in the
Standard, Multi-Pump and Fan, and Multi-PID applications
and adds in some additional control techniques. The
application is designed with 2 control places that use 8 digital
inputs, 2 analog inputs, 3 relay outputs, 1 digital output, and
2 analog outputs that are programmable. Motor controlwise
it provides the ability to do frequency and speed control and
adds Open Loop Speed Control as well as Torque Control.
For tuning the V/Hz curve, it has the ability to go out and ID
the motor characteristic and enters those specific
measurements into its parameters for better control. Drive/
Motor protections are programmable for desired actions
depending on the application. Below is a list of additional
features available in addition to the Standard, Multi-Pump
and Fan, and Multi-PID Application features that are available
in the Multi-Purpose Application.
●
Motor potentiometer reference control
●
External Brake control
●
Droop function with multiple loads
●
Motor Identification
●
Motor Control modes
I/O Controls
●
“Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
The design behind the programming of the digital inputs
in the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
programming. It is composed of multiple functions that
get assigned a digital input to that function, the
parameters in the drive are set up with specific
functions and by defining the Digital input and slot in
some cases depending on the what options are
available. For use of the drives control board inputs they
will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8. When
additional option cards are used, they will be defined as
DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
being installed in which will be either A or B, then the
IOY determines the type of card it is, which would be
IO1 or IO5, and the Z would indicate which input is
being used on that available option card.
●
“Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal be
it a relay output or a digital output that is assigned a
parameter. Within that parameter, it has different
functions that can be set.
The parameters of the Multi-Purpose Application are
explained on Page 130 of this manual, “Description of
Parameters.” The explanations are arranged according to the
parameter number.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
101
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Control I/O Configuration
●
●
Run 240 Vac and 24 Vdc control wiring in separate conduit
Communication wire to be shielded
Table 90. Multi-Purpose Application Default I/O Configuration
SW1
AI1 0–10V
AI2 SW1
AI2 SW2
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–20 mA
AI2 0–10V
AI2 10–10V
SW2
On
Off
Res
Pin
i
102
(RS-485 matching resistor)
Signal Name Signal
Default Setting
Description
1
+10V
Ref. Output Voltage
—
10 Vdc Supply Source
2
AI1+
Analog Input 1
0–10V
Voltage Speed Reference (Programmable to 4 mA to 20 mA)
3
AI1–
Analog Input 1 Ground
—
Analog Input 1 Common (Ground)
4
AI2+
Analog Input 2
4 mA to 20 mA
Current Speed Reference (Programmable to 0–10V)
5
AI2–
Analog Input 2 Ground
—
Analog Input 2 Common (Ground)
6
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
7
DIN5
Digital Input 5
Preset Speed B0
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 1
8
DIN6
Digital Input 6
Preset Speed B1
Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 2
9
DIN7
Digital Input 7
Emergency Stop (TI–)
Input forces VFD output to shut off
10
DIN8
Digital Input 8
Force Remote (TI+)
Input takes VFD from Local to Remote
11
CMB
DI5 to DI8 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
12
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
13
24V
+24 Vdc Output
—
14
DO1
Digital Output 1
Ready
Shows the drive is ready to run
15
24Vo
+24 Vdc Output
—
Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
16
GND
I/O Signal Ground
—
I/O Ground for Reference and Control
17
AO1+
Analog Output 1
Output Frequency
Shows Output frequency to motor 0–60 Hz (4 mA to 20 mA)
18
AO2+
Analog Output 2
Motor Current
Shows Motor current of motor 0–FLA (4 mA to 20 mA)
19
24Vi
+24 Vdc Input
—
External control voltage input
20
DIN1
Digital Input 1
Run Forward
Input starts drive in forward direction (start enable)
21
DIN2
Digital Input 2
Run Reverse
Input starts drive in reverse direction (start enable)
22
DIN3
Digital Input 3
External Fault
Input causes drive to fault
23
DIN4
Digital Input 4
Fault Reset
Input resets active faults
24
CMA
DI1 to DI4 Common
Grounded
Allows source input
25
A
RS-485 Signal A
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
26
B
RS-485 Signal B
—
Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
27
R3NO
Relay 3 Normally Open
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
28
R1NC
Relay 1 Normally Closed
Run
Relay output 1 shows VFD is in a run state
29
R1CM
Relay 1 Common
30
R1NO
Relay 1 Normally Open
31
R3CM
Relay 3 Common
At Speed
Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
32
R2NC
Relay 2 Normally Closed
Fault
Relay output 2 shows VFD is in a fault state
33
R2CM
Relay 2 Common
34
R2NO
Relay 2 Normally Open
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Multi-Purpose Application—Parameters List
On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter
groups. The parameter descriptions are given on Page 130, “Description of Parameters.”
The descriptions are arranged according to the parameter number.
Column explanations:
Code = Location indication on the keypad; shows the operator the present parameter number
Parameter = Name of parameter
Min = Minimum value of parameter
Max = Maximum value of parameter
Unit = Unit of parameter value; given if available
Default = Value preset by factory
ID = ID number of the parameter
Table 91. Monitor—M
Code
Parameter
Unit
Default
ID
M1
Output Frequency
Min.
Max.
Hz
0.00
1
M2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
M3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
M4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
M5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
M6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
M7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
M8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
M9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
M10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
M11
Torque Reference
%
0.0
15
M12
Analog Input 1
Varies
0.00
10
M13
Analog Input 2
Varies
0.00
11
M14
Analog Output 1
Varies
0.00
25
M15
Analog Output 2
Varies
0.00
575
M16
DI1, DI2, DI3
0
12
M17
DI4, DI5, DI6
0
13
M18
DI7, DI8
0
576
M19
DO1
0
14
M20
RO1, RO2, RO3
0
557
Note
M21
TC1, TC2, TC3
0
558
M22
Interval 1
0
559
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
M23
Interval 2
0
560
See M22
M24
Interval 3
0
561
See M22
M25
Interval 4
0
562
See M22
M26
Interval 5
0
563
See M22
M27
Timer 1
s
0
569
M28
Timer 2
s
0
571
M29
Timer 3
s
0
573
M30
PID1 Set Point
Varies
0.00
16
M31
PID1 Feedback
Varies
0.00
18
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
103
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 91. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
M32
PID1 Error Value
Varies
0.00
20
M33
PID1 Output
%
0.00
22
M34
PID1 Status
0
23
M35
PID2 Set Point
0.00
32
Varies
M36
PID2 Feedback
Varies
0.00
34
M37
PID2 Error Value
Varies
0.00
36
M38
PID2 Output
%
0.00
38
M39
PID2 Status
0
39
M40
Running Motors
0
26
M41
PT100 Temperature
1000.0
27
°C
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
104
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Stopped
1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
See M34
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 91. Monitor—M, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
M42
Last Active Fault
M43
RTC Battery Status
M44
Instance Motor Power
kW
M45
Energy Savings
Varies
M46
Multi-Monitoring
Default
ID
Note
0
28
0 = Null
1 = Over Current
2 = Over Voltage
3 = Earth Fault
4 = Charging Switch
5 = Emergency Stop
6 = Saturation Trip
7 = System Fault
8 = Undervoltage
9 = Input Phase Superv
10 = Output Phase Superv
11 = Brake Chopper Superv
12 = Drive Under Temp
13 = Drive Over Temp
14 = Motor Stalled
15 = Motor Over Temp
16 = Motor Under Load
17 = IP Address Conflict
18 = Power Board EEPROM Fault
19 = FRAM Fault
20 = S-Flash Fault
21 = MCU Watchdog Fault
22 = Start-up Prevent
23 = Thermistor Fault
24 = Fan Cooling
25 = Compatibility Fault
26 = Device Change
27 = Device Added
28 = Device Removed
29 = Device Unknown
30 = IGBT Over Temp
31 = Encoder Fault
32 = AI < 4 mA (4to20 mA)
33 = External Fault
34 = Keypad Comm Fault
35 = Fieldbus Fault
36 = Option Card Fault
37 = Bypass Overload
38 = Realtime Clock Fault
39 = PT100 Fault
40 = Motor ID Fault
41 = Current Measure Fault
42 = Power Wiring Error
43 = Control Board Overtemp
44 = Internal Control Supply
45 = Speed Search Fault
46 = Current Unbalance
47 = Replace Battery
48 = Replace Fan
49 = Safety Torque Off
50 = Current Limit Controller
51 = Over Voltage Controller
583
0 = Not Installed
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
0.0
1686
0, 1, 2
30
2119
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
105
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 92. Operate Mode—O
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
1
O1
Output Frequency
Hz
0.00
O2
Freq Reference
Hz
0.00
24
O3
Motor Speed
rpm
0
2
O4
Motor Current
A
0.0
3
O5
Motor Torque
%
0.0
4
O6
Motor Power
%
0.0
5
O7
Motor Voltage
V
0.0
6
O8
DC-link Voltage
V
0
7
O9
Unit Temperature
°C
0.0
8
O10
Motor Temperature
%
0.0
9
R11
Keypad Torque Ref
–300.0
300.0
%
0.0
782
R12 2
Keypad Reference
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
141
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Table 93. Basic Parameters—P1
Code
Parameter
P1.1 2
Min Frequency
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
101
P1.2 2
Max Frequency
Par. P1.1
400.00
Hz
Max Freq
102
P1.3 2
Accel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
103
P1.4 2
Decel Time 1
0.1
3000.0
s
3.0
104
P1.5 1
Motor Nom Current
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Drive Nom CT
486
P1.6 1
Motor Nom Speed
300
20000
rpm
Motor Nom Speed
489
P1.7 1
Motor PF
0.30
1.00
P1.8 1
Motor Nom Voltage
180
690
V
P1.9 1
Motor Nom Frequency
8.00
400.00
Hz
Motor Nom Freq
488
P1.10 2
Local/Remote Select
0
140
0 = Hold Last
1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
P1.11 2
Remote1 Control Place
0
135
0 = I/O Terminal
1 = Fieldbus
P1.12
Local Control Place
0
1695
0 = Keypad
1 = I/O Terminal
0.85
490
Motor Nom Volt
487
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
106
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 93. Basic Parameters—P1, continued
Code
Parameter
P1.13 12
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Local Reference
6
136
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
8 = Motor Pot
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1 –AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = MIN(AI1,AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
17 = PID1 Control
P1.14 12
Remote1 Reference
1
137
See P1.12
P1.15 1
Reverse Enable
1
1679
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default
ID
Note
Table 94. Analog Input—P2
Code
Parameter
Min.
P2.1
AI1 Mode
1
222
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P2.2 2
AI1 Signal Range
0
175
0 = 0–100%
1 = 20–100%
2 = Customized
P2.3 2
AI1 Custom Min
0.00
Par. P2.4
%
0.00
176
P2.4 2
AI1 Custom Max
Par. P2.3
100.00
%
100.00
177
P2.5 2
AI1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
P2.6 2
AI1 Signal Invert
P2.7 2
AI1 Joystick Hyst
P2.8 2
AI1 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
%
0.00
179
P2.9 2
AI1 Sleep Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
180
P2.10 2
AI1 Joystick Offset
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
133
P2.11
AI2 Mode
0
223
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
2 = –10 to +10V
P2.12 2
AI2 Signal Range
1
183
See P2.2
P2.13 2
AI2 Custom Min
0.00
Par. P2.14
%
0.00
184
P2.14 2
AI2 Custom Max
Par. P2.13
100.00
%
100.00
185
0.00
10.00
s
0.10
182
0
189
0.00
20.00
%
0.00
186
0.00
Max.
20.00
Unit
%
0.10
174
0
181
0.00
178
P2.15 2
AI2 Filter Time
P2.16 2
AI2 Signal Invert
P2.17 2
AI2 Joystick Hyst
P2.18 2
AI2 Sleep Limit
0.00
100.00
%
0.00
187
P2.19 2
AI2 Sleep Delay
0.00
320.00
s
0.00
188
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
107
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 94. Analog Input—P2, continued
Code
Parameter
P2.20 2
Min.
Max.
P2.21 2
P2.22 2
Unit
Default
ID
AI2 Joystick Offset
–50.00
50.00
%
0.00
134
AI Ref Scale Min Value
0.00
Par. P2.22
Hz
0.00
144
AI Ref Scale Max Value
Par. P2.21
400.00
Hz
0.00
145
Min.
Max.
Unit
Note
Table 95. Digital Input—P3
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P3.1 12
Start/Stop Logic
0
143
0 = Forward–Reverse
1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
3 = Start Pulse–Stop Pulse
P3.2 2
Start Signal 1
2
190
0 = DigIN:ForceOpen
1 = DigIN:ForceClose
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
P3.3 2
Start Signal 2
3
191
See P3.2
P3.4 12
Thermistor Input Select
0
881
0 = Digital Input
1 = Thermistor Input
P3.5 2
Reverse
0
198
See P3.2
P3.6 2
Ext. Fault Close
4
192
See P3.2
P3.7 2
Ext. Fault Open
1
193
See P3.2
P3.8 2
Fault Reset
5
200
See P3.2
P3.9 2
Run Enable
1
194
See P3.2
P3.10 2
Preset Speed B0
6
205
See P3.2
P3.11 2
Preset Speed B1
7
206
See P3.2
P3.12 2
Preset Speed B2
0
207
See P3.2
P3.13 2
PID1 Control Enable
0
550
See P3.2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
108
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 95. Digital Input—P3, continued
Code
Parameter
P3.14 2
P3.15 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
PID2 Control Enable
0
553
See P3.2
Accel/Decel Time Set
0
195
See P3.2
P3.16 2
Accel/Decel Prohibit
0
201
See P3.2
P3.17 2
No Access To Param
0
215
See P3.2
P3.18 2
Accel Pot Value
0
203
See P3.2
P3.19 2
Decel Pot Value
0
204
See P3.2
P3.20 2
Reset Pot Zero
0
216
See P3.2
P3.21 2
Remote Control
9
196
See P3.2
P3.22 2
Local Control
0
197
See P3.2
P3.23 2
Remote1/2 Select
0
209
See P3.2
P3.24 2
Second Motor Para Select
0
217
See P3.2
P3.25 2
Bypass Start
0
218
See P3.2
P3.26 2
DC Brake Enable
0
202
See P3.2
P3.27 2
Smoke Mode
0
219
See P3.2
P3.28 2
Fire Mode
0
220
See P3.2
P3.29 2
Fire Mode Ref Select
0
221
See P3.2
P3.30 2
PID1 Set Point Select
0
351
See P3.2
P3.31 2
PID2 Set Point Select
0
352
See P3.2
P3.32 2
Jog Enable
0
199
See P3.2
P3.33 2
Start Timer 1
0
224
See P3.2
P3.34 2
Start Timer 2
0
225
See P3.2
P3.35 2
Start Timer 3
0
226
See P3.2
P3.36 2
AI Ref Source Select
0
208
See P3.2
P3.37 2
Motor Interlock 1
0
210
See P3.2
P3.38 2
Motor Interlock 2
0
211
See P3.2
P3.39 2
Motor Interlock 3
0
212
See P3.2
P3.40 2
Motor Interlock 4
0
213
See P3.2
P3.41 2
Motor Interlock 5
0
214
See P3.2
P3.42 2
Emergency Stop
8
747
See P3.2
P3.43 2
Bypass Overload
0
1246
See P3.2
P3.44
Fire Mode Reverse
0
2118
See P3.2
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
109
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 96. Analog Output—P4
Code
Parameter
P4.1 2
Min.
Default
ID
Note
AO1 Mode
0
227
0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10V
P4.2 2
AO1 Function
1
146
0 = Not Used
1 = Output Frequency
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
5 = Motor Torque (0–Nom)
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
10 = PID1 Feedback 1
11 = PID1 Feedback 2
12 = PID1 Control Error Value
13 = PID1 Control Output
14 = PID2 Setpoint
15 = PID2 Feedback 1
16 = PID2 Feedback 2
17 = PID2 Control Error Value
18 = PID2 Control Output
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
21 = Output Freq (–2 to +2N)
22 = Motor Torque (–2 to +2N)
23 = Motor Power (–2 to +2N)
24 = PT100 Temperature
25 = FB Data Input 1
26 = FB Data Input 2
27 = FB Data Input 3
28 = FB Data Input 4
29 = FB Data Input 5
30 = FB Data Input 6
31 = FB Data Input 7
32 = FB Data Input 8
P4.3 2
AO1 Minimum
1
149
0 = 0V / 0 mA
1 = 2V / 4 mA
P4.4 2
AO1 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
147
P4.5 2
AO1 Scale
10
1000
%
100
150
P4.6 2
AO1 Inversion
0
148
P4.7 2
AO1 Offset
–100.00
100.00
%
0.00
173
P4.8 2
AO2 Mode
0
228
See P4.1
P4.9 2
AO2 Function
1
229
See P4.2
P4.10 2
AO2 Minimum
1
232
See P4.3
P4.11 2
AO2 Filter Time
0.00
10.00
s
1.00
230
P4.12 2
AO2 Scale
10
1000
%
P4.13 2
AO2 Inversion
P4.14 2
AO2 Offset
–100.00
Max.
100.00
Unit
%
100
233
0
231
0.00
234
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
110
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
See P2.6
See P2.6
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 97. Digital Output—P5
Code
Parameter
P5.1 2
Min.
Default
ID
Note
DO1 Function
1
151
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
10 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
11 = PID1 Superv
12 = PID2 Superv
13 = Overheat Warning
14 = Overcurrent Regular
15 = Overvoltage Regular
16 = Undervoltage Regular
17 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
18 = Ext Brake Control
19 = Ext Brake Inverted
20 = Torq Limit Superv
21 = Ref Limit Superv
22 = Control from I/O
23 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
24 = Thermistor Fault Output
25 = Fire Mode
26 = Bypass Run
27 = Ext Fault/Warning
28 = Remote Control
29 = Jog Speed Select
30 = Motor Therm Protection
31 = FB Digital Input 1
32 = FB Digital Input 2
33 = FB Digital Input 3
34 = FB Digital Input 4
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
40 = Power Limit Superv
41 = Temp Limit Superv
42 = Analog Input Superv
43 = Motor 1 Control
44 = Motor 2 Control
45 = Motor 3 Control
46 = Motor 4 Control
47 = Motor 5 Control
48 = Logic Fulfilled
49 = PID1 Sleep
50 = PID2 Sleep
P5.2 2
RO1 Function
2
152
See P5.1
P5.3 2
RO2 Function
3
153
See P5.1
P5.4 2
RO3 Function
7
538
See P5.1
P5.5 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv
0
154
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
3 = Brake-on Control
P5.6 2
Freq Limit 1 Supv Val
0.00
155
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
Unit
Hz
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
111
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 97. Digital Output—P5, continued
Code
Parameter
P5.7 2
Min.
Freq Limit 2 Supv
P5.8 2
Freq Limit 2 Supv Val
P5.9 2
Torque Limit Supv
P5.10 2
Torque Limit Supv Val
P5.11 2
Ref Limit Supv
P5.12 2
Ref Limit Supv Val
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
0.00
162
P5.13 2
Ext Brake Off Delay
0.0
100.0
s
0.5
163
P5.14 2
Ext Brake On Delay
0.0
100.0
s
1.5
164
P5.15 2
Temp Limit Supv
0
165
P5.16 2
Temp Limit Supv Val
40.0
166
P5.17 2
Power Limit Supv
0
167
P5.18 2
Power Limit Supv Val
0.0
168
P5.19 2
AI Supv Select
0
170
0 = AI1
1 = AI2
P5.20 2
AI Limit Supv
See P5.11
P5.21 2
AI Limit Supv Val
P5.22 2
PID1 Superv Enable
P5.23 2
PID1 Superv Upper Limit
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1347
P5.24 2
PID1 Superv Lower Limit
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1349
P5.25 2
PID1 Superv Delay
0
3000
s
P5.26 2
PID2 Superv Enable
0.00
–1000.0
–10.0
0.0
0.00
Max.
Par. P1.2
1000.0
75.0
200.0
100.00
Unit
Hz
%
°C
%
%
Default
ID
Note
0
157
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
3 = Brake-off Control
4 = Brake-on/off Control
0.00
158
0
159
100.0
160
0
161
0
171
0.00
172
0
1346
0
1351
0
1408
P5.27 2
PID2 Superv Upper Limit
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1409
P5.28 2
PID2 Superv Lower Limit
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1411
P5.29 2
PID2 Superv Delay
0
3000
s
0
1413
P5.30
RO1 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2111
P5.31
RO1 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2112
P5.32
RO2 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2113
P5.33
RO2 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2114
P5.34
RO3 On Delay
0
320
s
0
2115
P5.35
RO3 Off Delay
0
320
s
0
2116
P5.36
RO3 Reverse
0
1
0
2117
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
112
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
3 = Brake-off Control
0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
See P5.11
See P5.11
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 98. Logic Function—P6
Code
Parameter
P6.1 2
P6.2 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
Logic Function Select
0
751
0 = AND
1 = OR
2 = XOR
Logic Operation Input A
0
752
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
6 = Reversed
7 = Warning
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Control from I/O
15 = Ext Brake Control
16 = Bypass Run
17 = At Speed
18 = Remote Control
19 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
20 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
22 = PID1 Superv
23 = PID2 Superv
24 = Overheat Warning
28 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
29 = Overcurrent Regular
30 = Overvoltage Regular
31 = Undervoltage Regular
32 = Torq Limit Superv
33 = Ref Limit Superv
34 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
35 = Thermal Fault/Warning
36 = Bypass Run
37 = Jog Speed Select
38 = Motor Therm Protection
39 = FB Digital Input 1
40 = FB Digital Input 2
41 = FB Digital Input 3
42 = FB Digital Input 4
43 = Damper Control
44 = TC1 Status
45 = TC2 Status
46 = TC3 Status
47 = In E-Stop
48 = Power Limit Superv
49 = Temp Limit Superv
50 = Analog Input Superv
51 = Motor 1 Control
52 = Motor 2 Control
53 = Motor 3 Control
54 = Motor 4 Control
55 = Motor 5 Control
56 = Logic Fulfilled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
113
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 98. Logic Function—P6, continued
Code
Parameter
P6.3 2
Logic Operation Input B
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
753
0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
6 = Reversed
7 = Warning
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Control from I/O
15 = Ext Brake Control
16 = Bypass Run
17 = At Speed
18 = Remote Control
19 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
20 = Freq Limit 2 Superv
22 = PID1 Superv
23 = PID2 Superv
24 = Overheat Warning
28 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
29 = Overcurrent Regular
30 = Overvoltage Regular
31 = Undervoltage Regular
32 = Torq Limit Superv
33 = Ref Limit Superv
34 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
35 = Thermal Fault/Warning
36 = Bypass Run
37 = Jog Speed Select
38 = Motor Therm Protection
39 = FB Digital Input 1
40 = FB Digital Input 2
41 = FB Digital Input 3
42 = FB Digital Input 4
43 = Damper Control
44 = TC1 Status
45 = TC2 Status
46 = TC3 Status
47 = In E-Stop
48 = Power Limit Superv
49 = Temp Limit Superv
50 = Analog Input Superv
51 = Motor 1 Control
52 = Motor 2 Control
53 = Motor 3 Control
54 = Motor 4 Control
55 = Motor 5 Control
56 = Logic Fulfilled
Table 99. Drive Control—P7
Code
Parameter
P7.1 2
Remote 2 Control Place
P7.2 12
Remote 2 Reference
P7.3 2
Keypad Reference
P7.4 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
138
See P1.11
See P1.12
7
139
0.00
141
Keypad Direction
0
116
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
P7.5 2
Keypad Stop
1
114
0 = Enabled-Keypad Operation
1 = Always Enabled
P7.6 2
Jog Reference
0.00
117
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Par. P1.2
Hz
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
114
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 99. Drive Control—P7, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
P7.7 2
Motor Pot Ramp Time
0.1
2000.0
Hz/s
10.0
156
P7.8 2
Motor Pot Ref Reset
0
169
0 = No Reset
1 = Reset: Stop + Power Down
2 = Reset: Power Down
P7.9 2
Start Mode
0
252
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
P7.10 2
Stop Mode
1
253
0 = Coasting
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2
Ramp 1 Shape
0.0
247
P7.12 2
Ramp 2 Shape
0.0
10.0
s
0.0
248
P7.13 2
Accel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
249
0.0
10.0
s
ID
P7.14 2
Decel Time 2
0.1
3000.0
s
10.0
250
P7.15 2
Skip F1 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.16
Hz
0.00
256
P7.16 2
Skip F1 High Limit
Par. P7.15
400.00
Hz
0.00
257
P7.17 2
Skip F2 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.18
Hz
0.00
258
P7.18 2
Skip F2 High Limit
Par. P7.17
400.00
Hz
0.00
259
P7.19 2
Skip F3 Low Limit
0.00
Par. P7.20
Hz
0.00
260
P7.20 2
Skip F3 High Limit
Par. P7.19
400.00
Hz
P7.21 2
Prohibit Accel/Decel Ramp 0.1
P7.22 2
Power Loss Function
P7.23 2
Power Loss Time
0.3
5.0
P7.24
Currency
0
8
P7.25
Energy Cost
P7.26
Data Type
0
4
P7.27
Energy Savings Reset
0
Min.
Note
0.00
261
1.0
264
0
267
2.0
268
$
2121
0
2122
s
0
2123
0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Monthly Avg
3 = Yearly Avg
1
s
0
2124
0 = No Action
1 = Reset
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
287
0 = Freq Control
1 = Speed Control
5 = Overload Speed Control
6 = Overload Torque Control
Drive Nom VT
107
0
109
10.0
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
Table 100. Motor Control—P8
Code
Parameter
P8.1 12
Motor Control Mode
P8.2 1
Current Limit
P8.3 12
V/Hz Optimization
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
115
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 100. Motor Control—P8, continued
Code
Parameter
P8.4 12
Min.
V/Hz Ratio
P8.5 12
Field Weakening Point
P8.6 12
Voltage at FWP
10.00
200.00
%
100.00
290
P8.7 12
V/Hz Mid Frequency
0.00
Par. P8.5
Hz
V/Hz Curve
Midpoint Freq
291
P8.8 12
V/Hz Mid Voltage
0.00
100.00
%
100.00
292
P8.9 12
Zero Frequency Voltage
0.00
40.00
%
P8.10 2
Switching Frequency
Min Switching
Freq
Max Switching kHz
Freq
P8.11 2
8.00
Max.
400.00
Unit
Hz
Default
ID
Note
0
108
0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
3 = Linear + Flux Optimization
Field Weakening
Point Freq
289
0.00
293
Default Switching
Freq
288
Sine Filter Enable
0
1665
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.12 12
Overvoltage Control
1
294
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.13 2
Load Drooping
0.00
298
P8.14 2
Identification
0
299
P8.15 12
Neg Frequency Limit
–400.00
1574
P8.16 12
Pos Frequency Limit
Par. P8.15
400.00
Hz
400.00
1576
P8.17 2
Frequency Ramp Out
FilterTime Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1585
P8.18 2
Speed Error Filter Time
Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1591
P8.19 2
Speed Error Band Stop
Frequency
0.00
320.00
Hz
0.00
1592
P8.20 2
Speed Control Kp
0.0
1000.0
%
30.0
1593
P8.21 2
Speed Control Ti
0.0
3200.0
ms
20.0
1594
P8.22 2
Speed Control Kp At Field
Weakening
0.0
1000.0
%
100.0
1595
P8.23 2
Speed Control Kp Below F0 0.0
1000.0
%
0.0
1596
P8.24 2
Speed Control F0
0.00
Par. P8.25
Hz
0.00
1597
P8.25 2
Speed Control F1
Par. P8.24
Par. P8.5
Hz
0.00
1598
P8.26 2
Speed Control Kp Below T0 0.0
1000.0
%
0.0
1599
P8.27 2
Speed Control T0
100.0
%
0.0
1600
P8.28 2
Speed Control Kp Filter Time 0
Constant
3000
ms
0
1601
P8.29 2
Motoring Torque Limit
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1602
P8.30 2
Generator Torque Limit
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1603
P8.31 2
Torque Limit Forward
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1604
P8.32 2
Torque Limit Reverse
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1605
P8.33 2
Motoring Power Limit
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1607
P8.34 2
Generator Power Limit
0.0
300.0
%
300.0
1608
0.00
–400.00
0.0
100.00
Par. P8.16
%
Hz
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
116
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No Action
1 = Identification Only Stator
Resistor
2 = Identification with Run
3 = Identification No Run
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 100. Motor Control—P8, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P8.35 2
Acc Compensation Time
Constant
0.0
1000.0
%
0.0
1611
P8.36 2
Acc Compensation Filter
Time Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1612
P8.37 2
Flux Reference
0.0
500.0
%
100.0
1620
P8.38 2
Stop State Magnetization
0.0
100.0
%
100.0
1621
P8.39 2
Start Boost Rise Time
–1
32000
s
0
1622
P8.40 2
Flux Current Ramp Time
0
32000
ms
200
1623
P8.41 2
Zero Speed Start Time
0
32000
ms
100
1624
P8.42 2
Zero Speed Stop Time
0
32000
ms
100
1625
P8.43 2
Droop Control Filter Time
Constant
0
3000
ms
0
1630
P8.44 2
Startup Torque Selection
0
1631
P8.45 2
Torque Memory Start
0.0
1632
P8.46 2
Startup Torque Forward
–300.0
300.0
%
0.0
1633
P8.47 2
Startup Torque Reverse
–300.0
300.0
%
0.0
P8.48
Startup Torque Actual
P8.49 2
Startup Torque Time
0
10000
P8.50 1
Stator Resistor
0.001
65.535
ohm
0.033
771
P8.51 1
Rotor Resistor
0.001
65.535
ohm
0.034
772
P8.52 1
Leak Inductance
0.001
65.535
mh
0.128
773
P8.53 1
Mutual Inductance
0.01
655.35
mh
3.44
774
P8.54 1
Excitation Current
0.1
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
0.1
775
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
0
306
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Warning: Previous Freq
3 = Warning: Preset Freq
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
–300.0
300.0
%
%
ms
Note
0 = Not Used
1 = TorqueMemory
2 = TorqueReference
3 = StartupTorqueFWD/REV
1634
1635
50
1667
Table 101. Protections—P9
Code
Parameter
P9.1 12
4 mA Input Fault
P9.2 12
4 mA Fault Frequency
0.00
331
P9.3 12
External Fault
2
307
P9.4 12
Input Phase Fault
2
332
See P9.11
P9.5 12
Uvolt Fault Response
2
330
See P9.11
P9.6 12
Output Phase Fault
2
308
See P9.11
P9.7 12
Ground Fault
2
309
See P9.11
P9.8 12
Motor Thermal Protection
2
310
See P9.11
P9.9 2
Motor Thermal F0 Current
0.0
150.0
%
40.0
311
P9.10 2
Motor Thermal Time
1
200
min
12
312
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
See P9.11
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
117
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 101. Protections—P9, continued
Code
Parameter
P9.11 12
Min.
Default
ID
Note
Stall Protection
0
313
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
P9.12 2
Stall Current Limit
0.1
Active Motor
Nom I*2
A
Active Motor Nom
I*13/10
314
P9.13 2
Stall Time Limit
1.0
P9.14 2
Stall Frequency Limit
1.00
120.0
s
15.0
315
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
P9.15 12
Underload Protection
316
0
317
P9.16 2
Underload Fnom Torque
10.0
150.0
%
50.0
318
P9.17 2
Underload F0 Torque
5.0
P9.18 2
Underload Time Limit
2.00
150.0
%
10.0
319
600.00
s
20.00
320
P9.19 12
P9.20 2
Thermistor Fault Response
2
333
See P9.11
Line Start Lockout
2
750
0 = Disabled, No Change
1 = Enable, No Change
2 = Disabled, Changed
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.21 12
Fieldbus Fault Response
P9.22 12
OPTCard Fault Response
2
334
See P9.11
2
335
P9.23 12
Unit Under Temp Prot
See P9.11
2
1564
P9.24 2
See P9.11
Wait Time
0.10
10.00
P9.25 2
Trail Time
0.00
60.00
s
0.50
321
s
30.00
P9.26 2
Start Function
322
0
323
P9.27 2
Undervoltage Attempts
0
P9.28 2
Overvoltage Attempts
0
10
1
324
10
1
P9.29 2
325
Overcurrent Attempts
0
3
1
326
P9.30 2
4 mA Fault Attempts
0
10
1
327
P9.31 2
Motor Temp Fault Attempts 0
10
1
329
P9.32 2
External Fault Attempts
0
10
0
328
P9.33 2
Underload Attempts
0
10
1
336
P9.34 12
RTC Fault
1
955
P9.35 12
PT100 Fault Response
2
337
See P9.11
P9.36 12
Replace Battery Fault
Response
1
1256
See P9.11
P9.37 12
Replace Fan Fault Response
1
1257
See P9.11
P9.38 12
IP Address Confliction Resp
1
1678
See P9.11
P9.39
Cold Weather Mode
0
2126
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
Max.
Unit
1
P9.40
Cold Weather Voltage Level 0
20
%
2
2127
P9.41
Cold Weather Time Out
10
min
3
2128
P9.42
Cold Weather Password
P9.43
Under Temp Fault Override 0
0
2130
0
0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
2 = Start
See P9.11
2129
1
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
118
See P9.11
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = No
1 = Yes
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 102. PID Controller 1—P10
Code
Parameter
P10.1 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
PID1 Control Gain
0.00
200.00
%
100.00
1294
P10.2 2
PID1 Control ITime
0.00
600.00
s
1.00
1295
P10.3 2
PID1 Control DTime
0.00
100.00
s
0.00
1296
P10.4 12
PID1 Process Unit
0
1297
P10.5 2
PID1 Process Unit Min
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1298
P10.6 2
PID1 Process Unit Max
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
100.00
1300
P10.7 2
PID1 Process Unit Decimal
0
4
2
1302
P10.8 12
PID1 Error Inversion
P10.9 2
PID1 Dead Band
0.00
99999.99
P10.10 2
PID1 Dead Band Delay
0.00
P10.11 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
Par. P10.5
P10.12 2
PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
P10.13 2
PID1 Ramp Time
0
1303
Varies
0.00
1304
320.00
s
0.00
1306
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1307
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1309
0.00
300.00
s
0.00
1311
Note
0=%
1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = e&
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
See P2.6
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
119
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 102. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.14 12
Min.
PID1 Set Point 1 Source
P10.15 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.16 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.17 12
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep
Enable
P10.18 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1316
P10.19 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1317
P10.20 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1318
P10.21 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P10.22 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Source
P10.23 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.24 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.25 12
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep
Enable
P10.26 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
P10.27 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 0
P10.28 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Wake Up
Level
Par. P10.5
P10.29 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P10.30 12
PID1 Feedback Function
P10.31 2
PID1 Feedback Gain
–1000.0
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
1312
0 = Not Used
1 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
2 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
10 = FB Data Input 4
11 = FB Data Input 5
12 = FB Data Input 6
13 = FB Data Input 7
14 = FB Data Input 8
%
0.00
1313
%
100.00
1314
0
1315
1.0
1320
2
1321
%
0.00
1322
%
100.00
1323
0
1324
Hz
0.00
1325
3000
s
0
1326
Par. P10.6
Varies
0.00
1327
1.0
1329
0
1330
100.0
1331
1000.0
%
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
120
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 102. PID Controller 1—P10, continued
Code
Parameter
P10.32 12
Min.
PID1 Feedback 1 Source
P10.33 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.34 2
PID1 Feedback 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.35 12
PID1 Feedback 2 Source
P10.36 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.37 2
PID1 Feedback 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.38 12
PID1 Feedforward Func
P10.39 2
PID1 Feedforward Gain
P10.40 12
PID1 Feedforward 1 Source
P10.41 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.42 2
PID1 Feedforward 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.43 12
PID1 Feedforward 2 Source
P10.44 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P10.45 2
PID1 Feedforward 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P10.46 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp
Enable
P10.47 2
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max –200.00
P10.48 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp
Enable
P10.49 2
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Max –200.00
–1000.0
Max.
1000.0
200.00
200.00
Unit
Default
ID
Note
1
1332
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
%
0.00
1333
%
100.00
1334
0
1335
%
0.00
1336
%
100.00
1337
0
1338
%
100.0
1339
0
1340
%
0.00
1341
%
100.00
1342
0
1343
%
0.00
1344
%
100.00
1345
0
1352
0.00
1353
0
1354
0.00
1355
%
%
See P10.32
0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
10 = FB Data Input 6
11 = FB Data Input 7
12 = FB Data Input 8
See P10.40
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
121
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 103. PID Controller 2—P11
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P11.1 2
PID2 Control Gain
0.00
200.00
%
100.00
1356
P11.2 2
PID2 Control I Time
0.00
600.00
s
1.00
1357
P11.3 2
PID2 Control D Time
0.00
100.00
s
0.00
1358
P11.4 12
PID2 Process Unit
0
1359
P11.5 2
PID2 Process Unit Min
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
0.00
1360
P11.6 2
PID2 Process Unit Max
–99999.99
99999.99
Varies
100.00
1362
P11.7 2
PID2 Process Unit Decimal
0
4
2
1364
P11.8 12
PID2 Error Inversion
P11.9 2
PID2 Dead Band
0.00
99999.99
P11.10 2
PID2 Dead Band Delay
0.00
P11.11 2
PID2 Keypad Set Point 1
P11.12 2
PID2 Keypad Set Point 2
P11.13 2
PID2 Ramp Time
P11.14 12
PID2 Set Point 1 Source
P11.15 2
0
1365
Varies
0.00
1366
320.00
s
0.00
1368
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1369
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1371
0.00
300.00
s
0.00
1373
1
1374
PID2 Set Point 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1375
P11.16 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1376
P11.17 12
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep
Enable
0
1377
P11.18 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1378
P11.19 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1379
P11.20 2
PID2 Set Point 1 WakeUp
Level
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1380
P11.21 2
PID2 Set Point 1 Boost
–2.0
2.0
P11.22 12
PID2 Set Point 2 Source
P11.23 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1384
P11.24 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1385
P11.25 12
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep
Enable
0
1386
P11.26 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 0.00
400.00
Hz
0.00
1387
P11.27 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 0
3000
s
0
1388
P11.28 2
PID2 Set Point 2 WakeUp
Level
Par. P11.5
Par. P11.6
Varies
0.00
1389
P11.29 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Boost
–2.0
2.0
1.0
1391
P11.30 12
PID2 Feedback Func
P11.31 2
PID2 Feedback Gain
P11.32 12
PID2 Feedback 1 Source
P11.33 2
1.0
1382
2
1383
0
1392
1393
–1000.0
1000.0
%
100.0
1
1394
PID2 Feedback 1 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1395
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1396
0
1397
P11.34 2
PID2 Feedback 1 Max
P11.35 12
PID2 Feedback 2 Source
P11.36 2
PID2 Feedback 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
%
0.00
1398
P11.37 2
PID2 Feedback 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1399
P11.38 12
PID2 Feedforward Func
0
1400
P11.39 2
PID2 Feedforward Gain
100.0
1401
P11.40 12
PID2 Feedforward 1 Source
P11.41 2
PID2 Feedforward 1 Min
–1000.0
–200.00
1000.0
200.00
%
%
0
1402
0.00
1403
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
122
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
See P10.4
See P2.6
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.14
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
See P10.30
See P10.32
See P10.32
See P10.38
See P10.40
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 103. PID Controller 2—P11, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P11.42 2
PID2 Feedforward 1 Max
–200.00
200.00
%
100.00
1404
P11.43 12
PID2 Feedforward 2 Source
P11.44 2
PID2 Feedforward 2 Min
–200.00
200.00
P11.45 2
PID2 Feedforward 2 Max
–200.00
200.00
P11.46 2
PID2 Set Point1 Comp
Enable
P11.47 2
PID2 Set Point1 Comp Max –200.00
P11.48 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp
Enable
P11.49 2
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Max –200.00
200.00
200.00
0
1405
%
0.00
1406
%
100.00
1407
0
1414
%
%
0.00
1415
0
1416
0.00
1417
Note
See P10.40
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 104. Preset Speed—P12
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P12.1 2
Preset Speed 1
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
5.00
105
P12.2 2
Preset Speed 2
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
10.00
106
P12.3 2
Preset Speed 3
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
118
P12.4 2
Preset Speed 4
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
20.00
119
P12.5 2
Preset Speed 5
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
120
P12.6 2
Preset Speed 6
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
30.00
121
P12.7 2
Preset Speed 7
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
35.00
122
Note
Table 105. Torque Control—P13
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P13.1 2
Torque Limit
0.0
400.0
%
400.0
295
P13.2 2
Torque Limit Control P
0.00
320.00
30.00
296
P13.3 2
Torque Limit Control I
0.00
320.00
2.00
297
P13.4 2
Torque Ref Select
0
303
P13.5
Keypad Torque Ref
–300.0
300.0
%
0.0
782
P13.6 2
Torque Ref Max
–300.0
300.0
%
100.0
304
P13.7 2
Torque Ref Min
–300.0
300.0
%
0.0
305
P13.8 2
Torque Control Freq Min
0.00
Par. P1.2
Hz
3.00
300
P13.9 2
OL Torque Control P
0.00
320.00
1.50
301
P13.10 2
OL Torque Control I
0.00
320.00
1.00
302
P13.11 2
Torque Control Freq Max
0
1666
P13.12 2
Window Pos Width
0.00
50.00
Hz
2.00
1636
P13.13 2
Window Neg Width
0.00
50.00
Hz
2.00
1637
P13.14 2
Window Pos Off Limit
0.00
Par. P13.12
Hz
0.00
1638
Note
0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = AI1 Joystick
6 = AI2 Joystick
7 = Keypad Torque Ref
8 = FB Data Input 1
0 = Max Frequency
1 = Selected Freq. Ref
2 = Preset Speed 7
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
123
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 105. Torque Control—P13, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
P13.15 2
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
WindowNeg Off Limit
P13.16 2
Torque Reference Filter TC
0.00
Par. P13.13
Hz
0.00
1639
0
32000
ms
0
P13.17
Pull Out Torque
1640
0
1000.0
%
250.0
1606
P13.18
Startup Torque Time
0
10000
ms
50
1667
P13.19
Stop State Magnetization
Time
0
32000
S
0
1684
Note
Table 106. Brake—P14
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P14.1 12
DC-Brake Current
Drive Nom
CT*15/100
Drive Nom
CT*15/10
A
Drive Nom CT*1/2
254
P14.2 12
Start DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
263
P14.3 12
Stop DC-Brake Frequency
0.10
10.00
Hz
1.50
262
P14.4 12
Stop DC-Brake Time
0.00
600.00
s
0.00
255
P14.5 12
Brake Chopper
0
251
0 = Disabled
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12
Flux Brake
0
266
0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12
Flux Brake Current
Active Motor Nom
I*1/2
265
Active Motor
Nom I*1/10
Par. P8.2
A
Min.
Max.
Unit
Note
Table 107. Fire Mode—P15
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
Note
P15.1 12
Fire Mode Function
0
535
0 = Closing Contact
1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12
Fire Mode Ref Select
Function
0
536
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P15.3 2
Fire Mode Min Frequency
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
15.00
537
P15.4 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 1
0.0
100.0
%
75.0
565
P15.5 2
Fire Mode Freq Ref 2
0.0
100.0
%
100.0
564
P15.6 12
Smoke Purge Frequency
0.0
100.0
%
50.0
554
Table 108. Second Motor Parameter—P16
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
P16.1 1
Motor Nom Current 2
Drive Nom
CT*1/10
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
Drive Nom CT
577
P16.2 1
Motor Nom Speed 2
300
20000
rpm
2nd Motor Nom
Speed
578
P16.3 1
Motor PF 2
0.30
1.00
0.85
579
P16.4 1
Motor Nom Volt 2
180
690
V
2nd Motor Nom Volt 580
P16.5 1
Motor Nom Freq 2
8.00
400.00
Hz
2nd Motor Nom Freq 581
P16.6 1
Stator Resistor 2
0.001
65.535
ohm
0.033
1419
P16.7 1
Rotor Resistor 2
0.001
65.535
ohm
0.034
1420
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
124
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 108. Second Motor Parameter—P16, continued
Code
Parameter
P16.8 1
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Leak Inductance 2
0.001
65.535
P16.9 1
Mutual Inductance 2
0.01
655.35
mh
0.128
1421
mh
3.44
P16.10 1
Excitation Current 2
0.1
Drive Nom
CT*2
A
1422
0.1
1423
Min.
Max.
Unit
Note
Table 109. Bypass—P17
Code
Parameter
P17.1 12
Bypass Enable
P17.2 12
Bypass Start Delay
P17.3 12
Auto Bypass
P17.4 12
Auto Bypass Delay
P17.5 12
Overcurrent Bypass Enable
P17.6 12
1
Note
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5
544
542
10
543
0
547
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
IGBT Fault Bypass Enable
0
546
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.7 12
4 mA Fault Bypass Enable
0
548
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.8 12
Undervoltage Bypass Enable
0
545
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.9 12
Overvoltage Bypass Enable
0
549
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note
32765
s
ID
1418
0
0
32765
Default
0
s
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 110. Multi-Pump Control—P18
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
P18.1 12
Number of Motors
1
5
P18.2 2
Bandwidth
0.0
100.0
P18.3 2
Bandwidth Delay
0
3600
P18.4 2
Unit
Default
ID
1
342
%
10.0
343
s
10
344
Interlock Enable
1
350
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.5 2
Include Freq Converter
1
346
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.6 2
Auto-Change Enable
0
345
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.7 2
Auto-Change Interval
0.0
3000.0
h
48.0
347
P18.8 2
Auto-Change Freq Limit
Par. P1.1
Par. P1.2
Hz
25.00
349
P18.9 2
Auto-Change Motor Limit
0
5
1
348
P18.10 12
Damper Start
0
483
P18.11 12
Damper Time Out
1
32500
s
5
484
P18.12 12
Damper Delay
1
32500
s
5
485
0 = Normal
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
125
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 111. Real Time Clock—P19
Code
Parameter
P19.1 2
Min.
Interval 1 On Time
0,0,0
491
P19.2 2
Interval 1 Off Time
0,0,0
493
P19.3 2
Interval 1 From Day
0
517
P19.4 2
Interval 1 To Day
0
518
See P19.3
P19.5 2
Interval 1 Channel
0
519
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
P19.6 2
Interval 2 On Time
0,0,0
495
P19.7 2
Interval 2 Off Time
0,0,0
497
P19.8 2
Interval 2 From Day
0
520
See P19.3
P19.9 2
Interval 2 To Day
0
521
See P19.3
P19.10 2
Interval 2 Channel
0
522
See P19.5
P19.11 2
Interval 3 On Time
0,0,0
499
P19.12 2
Interval 3 Off Time
0,0,0
501
P19.13 2
Interval 3 From Day
0
523
See P19.3
P19.14 2
Interval 3 To Day
0
524
See P19.3
P19.15 2
Interval 3 Channel
0
525
See P19.5
P19.16 2
Interval 4 On Time
0,0,0
503
P19.17 2
Interval 4 Off Time
0,0,0
505
P19.18 2
Interval 4 From Day
0
526
P19.19 2
Interval 4 To Day
0
527
See P19.3
P19.20 2
Interval 4 Channel
0
528
See P19.5
P19.21 2
Interval 5 On Time
0,0,0
507
P19.22 2
Interval 5 Off Time
0,0,0
509
P19.23 2
Interval 5 From Day
0
529
See P19.3
P19.24 2
Interval 5 To Day
0
530
See P19.3
P19.25 2
Interval 5 Channel
0
531
See P19.5
P19.26 2
Timer 1 Duration
P19.27 2
Timer 1 Channel
P19.28 2
Timer 2 Duration
P19.29 2
Timer 2 Channel
P19.30 2
Timer 3 Duration
P19.31 2
Timer 3 Channel
0
0
0
Max.
72000
72000
72000
Unit
s
s
s
Default
ID
0
511
0
532
0
513
0
533
0
515
0
534
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
126
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Note
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
See P19.3
0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
See P19.27
See P19.27
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 112. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1
Code
Parameter
P20.1.1 2
P20.1.2 2
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
Note
FB Data Output 1 Sel
1
1556
FB Data Output 2 Sel
2
1557
P20.1.3 2
FB Data Output 3 Sel
3
1558
P20.1.4 2
FB Data Output 4 Sel
4
1559
P20.1.5 2
FB Data Output 5 Sel
5
1560
P20.1.6 2
FB Data Output 6 Sel
6
1561
P20.1.7 2
FB Data Output 7 Sel
7
1562
P20.1.8 2
FB Data Output 8 Sel
359
1563
Default
ID
Note
0
586
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
Table 113. Modbus RTU—P20.2
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.2.1
RS485 Comm Set
P20.2.2
Slave Address
18
587
P20.2.3
Baud Rate
2
584
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
P20.2.4
Parity Type
2
585
0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
P20.2.5
Protocol Status
0
588
0 = Initial
1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6
Slave Busy
0
589
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
P20.2.7
Parity Error
0
590
P20.2.8
Slave Fault
0
591
P20.2.9
Last Fault Response
0
592
P20.2.10
Comm Timeout Modbus RTU
ms
2000
593
Unit
Default
ID
Note
2
594
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
1
595
1
Max.
Unit
247
Table 114. Modbus MS/TCP—P20.2
Code
Parameter
P20.2.11
BACnet Baud Rate
P20.2.12
MAC Address
0
127
0
4194302
P20.2.13
Instance Number
P20.2.14
Comm Timeout BACnet
P20.2.15
P20.2.16
Min.
Max.
0
596
6000
598
Protocol Status
0
599
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Fault Code
0
600
0 = None
1 = Sole Master
ms
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
127
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 115. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3
Code
Parameter
Min.
P20.3.1
IP Address Mode
P20.3.2
Active IP Address
1507
P20.3.3
Active Subnet Mask
1509
P20.3.4
Active Default Gateway
1511
P20.3.5
MAC Address
1513
P20.3.6
Static IP Address
192.168.1.254
1501
P20.3.7
Static Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
1503
P20.3.8
Static Default Gateway
192.168.1.1
1505
P20.3.9
EtherNet/IP Protocol Status
0
608
P20.3.10
Connection Limit
2
609
P20.3.11
Modbus TCP Unit ID
1
610
P20.3.12
Comm Timeout Modbus TCP
P20.3.13
P20.3.14
0
Max.
Unit
2
ms
Default
ID
Note
1
1500
0 = Static IP
1 = DHCP with AutoIP
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
2000
611
Protocol Status
0
612
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
Slave Busy
0
613
0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
0
614
Note: Codes P20.3.15–P20.3.17 are for Modbus TCP.
P20.3.15
Parity Error
P20.3.16
Slave Failure
0
615
P20.3.17
Last Fault Response
0
616
Default
ID
Note
Table 116. Basic Setting—P21.1
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
P21.1.1
Language
0
340
0 = English
1 = English
2 = English
P21.1.2 1
Application
0
142
0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
P21.1.3
Parameter Sets
0
619
0 = No
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4
Up To Keypad
0
620
See P21.3.1
P21.1.5
Down From Keypad
0
621
0 = No
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.6
Parameter Comparison
0
623
0 = No
1 = Compare with Keypad
2 = Compare with Default
3 = Compare with Set 1
4 = Compare with Set 2
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
128
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Table 116. Basic Setting—P21.1, continued
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
P21.1.7
Password
0
9999
P21.1.8
Parameter Lock
P21.1.9
P21.1.10
P21.1.11
Timeout Time
0
65535
P21.1.12
Contrast Adjust
5
18
P21.1.13
Backlight Time
0
65535
P21.1.14
Fan Control
P21.1.15
HMI ACK Timeout
200
5000
P21.1.16
HMI Retry Number
1
10
Min.
Max.
Unit
Default
ID
0
624
0
625
0 = Change Enable
1 = Change Disable
Multimonitor Set
0
627
See P21.1.8
Default Page
0
628
0 = None
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
30
629
12
630
10
631
3
632
200
633
5
634
Default
ID
s
min
ms
Note
0 = Continuous
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp
Table 117. Version Info—P21.2
Code
Parameter
Unit
P21.2.1
Keypad Software Version
640
P21.2.2
Motor Control Software
Version
642
P21.2.3
Application Software
Version
Note
App Firmware
644
Default
ID
Note
Table 118. Application Info—P21.3
Code
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
P21.3.1
Brake Chopper Stat
646
0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.3.2
Brake Resistor
647
See P21.3.1
P21.3.3
Serial Number
648
Table 119. User Info—P21.4
Code
Parameter
Default
ID
P21.4.1
Real Time Clock
Min.
Max.
Unit
0.0.0.1:1:13
566
P21.4.2
Daylight Saving
0
582
P21.4.3
Total MWh Count
Mwh
Total Power Day Count
603
P21.4.5
Total Power Hr Count
606
P21.4.6
Trip MWh Count
Clear Trip MWh Count
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
601
P21.4.4
P21.4.7
Note
Mwh
604
0
635
P21.4.8
Trip Power Day Count
636
P21.4.9
Trip Power Hr Count
637
P21.4.10
Clear Trip Power Count
0
639
0 = Not Reset
1 = Reset
See P21.4.8
Notes
Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.
1
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
129
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
On the following pages you will find the parameter descriptions arranged according to
the parameter number.
Some parameter names are followed by a number code indicating the applications in
which the parameter is included. See the list of applications below. The parameter
numbers under which the parameter appears in different applications are also given.
Application Level
1 Standard Application
2 Multi-Pump and Fan Application
3 Multi-PID Application
4 Multi-Purpose Application
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P1.1
101
Min Frequency
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P1.2
102
Max Frequency
1, 2, 3, 4
These define the frequency limits of the frequency converter. The maximum value
for these parameters is 400 Hz.
RW
P1.3
103
Accel Time 1
1, 2, 3, 4
The time required for the output frequency to accelerate from zero frequency to Max
frequency (P1.2).
RW
P1.4
104
Decel Time 1
1, 2, 3, 4
The time required for the output frequency to decelerate from Max frequency (P1.2)
to zero frequency.
RW
Figure 35. Acceleration and Deceleration Time
fout
(Hz)
P1.2
P1.1
P1.1
P1.3
t1
P6.6
t (s)
t2
The values for the acceleration time t1 and the deceleration time t 2 are calculated as follows:
t 1 = (P1.2–P1.1) x P1.3
P1.2
t 2 = (P1.2–P1.1) x P1.4
P1.2
The defined acceleration (P1.3) and deceleration times (P1.4) apply for all changes to
the frequency setpoint value.
If the start-release (FWD, REV) is switched off, the output frequency (fOut) is
immediately set to zero. The motor runs down uncontrolled.
If a controlled run-down is requested (with value from P1.4), parameter P7.10
must be 1.
1
130
When setting a minimum output frequency (P1.4 greater than 0 Hz), the acceleration and deceleration time of the drive is reduced to t1 or t2.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P1.5
486
Motor Nom Current
1, 2, 3, 4
Motor nominal nameplate full load current. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
RW
Figure 36. Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate
P1.5
P1.8
230/400V
4.0/2.3A
0.75 kW cos 0.67
1410 min –1
50 Hz
P1.7
P1.6
P1.9
P1.6
489
Motor Nom Speed
Motor nominal nameplate base speed. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P1.7
490
Motor PF
1, 2, 3, 4
Motor nominal nameplate full load power factor. Find this value on the rating plate of
the motor.
RW
P1.8
487
Motor Nom Voltage
Motor nominal nameplate base voltage. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P1.9
488
Motor Nom Frequency
1, 2, 3, 4
Motor nominal nameplate base frequency. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor. This parameter sets the Field Weakening Point (P8.4) to the same value.
RW
P1.10
140
Local/Remote Select
1, 2, 3, 4
This parameter determines the control source. There are two different places from
which the frequency converter can be controlled: Local, Remote, or it will hold last
place on power cycle.
The active control place can also be changed by pressing the LOC/REM button on
the keypad, using a programed digital input, or this parameter. Local control means
keypad. Remote control can be a remote control panel or communication bus. With
remote there are two different control places, remote1 and remote2, which can be
selected based on a digital input setting. For each control place, the actual control
source is selected with this parameter; a different symbol will appear on the
alphanumeric display.
RW
P1.11
135
Remote1 Control Place
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects where the drive will look for the start command. I/O terminals would be from
the digital hardwired inputs. Fieldbus would be a communication bus. Keypad display
will indicate which mode is selected.
RW
P1.12
1695
Local Control Place
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects where the drive will look for the start command. I/O terminals would be from
the digital hardwired inputs or keypad Start/Stop buttons. Keypad display will
indicate which mode is selected.
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
131
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P1.13
136
Local Reference
This parameter determines the reference for Local control mode.
1, 2, 3, 4
Standard
MultiPump
and Fan
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
6 = Keypad—keypad reference (P1.7.3)
7 = Fieldbus Ref—reference sent of communication bus
8 = Motor Pot—selects digital inputs for digital inputs to increase/decrease speed
9 = Max Frequency—maximum frequency value (P1.1.2)
10 = AI1+AI2—sums the analog input values
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
11 = AI1–AI2—subtracts the analog inputs AI1 from AI2
12 = AI2–AI1—subtracts the analog inputs AI2 from AI1
13 = AI1*AI2—multiplies analog inputs AI1 and AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2—selects analog inputs based off of digital input
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the least value
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = Max (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the higher value
17 = PID1 Control—selects the PID calculation for output to maintain reference value
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
Application—Selection
0 = AI1—analog input on terminals 2–3
1 = AI2—analog input on terminals 4–5
2 = Slot A: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot A
3 = Slot B: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot B
4 = AI1 joystick—analog input on terminals 2–3, used for joystick control
5 = AI2 joystick—analog input on terminals 4–5, used for joystick control
P1.14
137
Remote1 Ref
This parameter determines the reference for Remote1 control mode.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Standard
MultiPump
and Fan
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
6 = Keypad—keypad reference (P1.7.3)
7 = Fieldbus Ref—reference sent of communication bus
8 = Motor Pot—selects digital inputs for digital inputs to increase/decrease speed
9 = Max Frequency—maximum frequency value (P1.1.2)
10 = AI1+AI2—sums the analog input values
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
11 = AI1–AI2—subtracts the analog inputs AI1 from AI2
12 = AI2–AI1—subtracts the analog inputs AI2 from AI1
13 = AI1*AI2—multiplies analog inputs AI1 and AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2—selects analog inputs based off of digital input
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the least value
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = Max (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the higher value
17 = PID1 Control—selects the PID calculation for output to maintain reference value
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
Application—Selection
0 = AI1—analog input on terminals 2–3
1 = AI2—analog input on terminals 4–5
2 = Slot A: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot A
3 = Slot B: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot B
4 = AI1 joystick—analog input on terminals 2–3, used for joystick control
5 = AI2 joystick—analog input on terminals 4–5, used for joystick control
132
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P1.15
1679
Reverse Enable
Enables or disables the reverse motor direction.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.1
222
AI1 Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects the analog input mode for AI1 terminals 2 and 3 for current or voltage, also
need to set DIP switches on control board.
RW
P2.2
175
AI1 Signal Range
With this parameter you can select the analog input 1 signal range. For selection
“Customized,” see P2.3 and P2.4.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Figure 37. Analog Input AI Scaling
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.1 = Custom
P2.2 = 0
AI2 = 0 – 100%
P2.2 = 1
AI2 = 20 – 100%
P2.21
0
P2.3
4 mA
P2.4
AI2
(Term. 3,4)
20 mA
P2.3
176
AI1 Custom Min
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.4
177
AI1 Custom Max
These parameters set the analog input signal for any input signal span within
0–100%.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.5
174
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
AI1 Custom Min <= AI1 Custom Max.
AI1 Filter Time
When this parameter is given a value greater than 0, the function that filters out
disturbances from the incoming analog signal is activated.
A long filtering time makes the regulation response slower.
Figure 38. AI1 Signal Filtering
AI
AO
100%
63%
P2.5
P2.15
P4.4
P4.11
AI1
AI2
AO1
AO2
t (s)
Notes
1 Analog signal with faults (unfiltered).
2 Filtered analog signal.
3 Filter time constant at 63% of the set value.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
133
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P2.6
181
AI1 Signal Invert
1, 2, 3, 4
Inverts the reference signal. Maximum reference becomes minimum frequency and
minimum reference becomes maximum frequency.
If this parameter = 0, no inversion of analog Vin signal takes place.
If this parameter = 1, inversion of analog signal takes place.
Figure 39. AI1 No Signal Inversion
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.2/2.12 = 0
AI1 = 0 – 100%
P2.2/2.12 = 1
AI1 = Custom
P2.21
0
P2.3/2.13
P2.4/2.14
AI1
(Term. 2)
100%
Figure 40. AI1 Signal Inversion
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.2/2.12 = 0
AI1 = 0 – 100%
P2.2/2.12 = 1
AI1 = Custom
P2.21
AI1
(Term. 2)
0
P2.3/2.13
P2.4/2.14
100%
Maximum AI1 signal = minimum set speed.
Minimum AI1 signal = maximum set speed.
134
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P2.7
178
AI1 Joystick Hyst
1, 2, 3, 4
This parameter defines the joystick hysteresis between 0 and 20%. When the
joystick is turned from reverse to forward, the output frequency falls linearly to the
selected minimum frequency (joystick in middle position) and stays there until the
joystick is turned toward the forward command. How much the joystick must be
turned to start the increase of the frequency toward the selected maximum
frequency is dependent on the amount of joystick hysteresis defined with this
parameter.
RW
If the value of this parameter is 0, the frequency starts to increase linearly
immediately when the joystick is turned toward the forward command from the
middle position. When the control is changed from forward to reverse, the frequency
follows the same pattern the other way around. See Figure 41.
Figure 41. Example of Joystick Hysteresis
Frequency Reference
Hz
Reference
Scaling Max
P2.22= 70 Hz
REVERSE
50%
FORWARD
50%
A
B
From Reverse to Forward
Max Freq.
P1.2 = 50 Hz
From Forward to Reverse
Analog
Input (V/mA)
(0 – 10V/20 mA)
Min Freq. P1.1 =
Ref. Scaling Min
P2.21 = 0 Hz
P2.3/2.13
= 20%
Joystick Hysteresis,
P2.7 = 20%
P2.4/2.14
= 90%
In this example, the value of P1.2.9 (Sleep limit) =0.
P2.8
179
AI1 Sleep Limit
1, 2, 3, 4
The frequency converter keeps on output min frequency if the AI signal level falls
below the Sleep limit defined within this parameter. This will allow the output to be
shut off after the sleep delay until converter AI signal level rises again.
RW
Figure 42. Example of Sleep Limit Function
Frequency Reference
Hz
Reference
Scaling Max
P2.22 = 70 Hz
FORWARD
50%
REVERSE
50%
A
B
From Reverse to Forward
Max Freq.
P1.2 = 50 Hz
START
STOP
Min Freq. P1.1 =
Ref. Scaling Min
P2.21 = 0 Hz
STOP
START
From Forward to Reverse
Analog
Input (V/mA)
(0 – 10V/20 mA)
P2.3/2.13
= 20%
Sleep Limit
P2.7/2.18 = 7%
P2.4/2.14
= 90%
Joystick Hysteresis,
P1.2.8 = 20%
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
135
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P2.9
180
AI1 Sleep Delay
This parameter defines that the time the analog input signal has to stay under the
Sleep limit determined with parameter P2.9 in order to make the frequency
converter output min frequency.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.10
133
AI1 Joystick Offset
1, 2, 3, 4
The frequency zero point is the middle of AI range. Joystick offset means how much
the zero point is moved in the forward or reverse direction.
RW
P2.11
223
AI2 Mode
Selects the analog input mode for AI2 terminal 4 and 5 for current or voltage, also
need to set DIP switches on control board.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.12
183
AI2 Signal Range
1,2,3,4
RW
P2.13
184
AI2 Custom Min
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.14
185
AI2 Custom Max
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.15
182
AI2 Filter Time
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.16
189
AI2 Signal Invert
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.17
186
AI2 Joystick Hyst
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.18
187
AI2 Sleep Limit
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.19
188
AI2 Sleep Delay
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.20
134
AI2 Joystick Offset
See AI1 parameters.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.21
144
AI Ref Scale Min Value
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P2.22
145
AI Ref Scale Max Value
0.00 <= P2.21 <= P2.22 <= 400.00. With values set at 0 scaling will follow the
minimum and maximum frequency values.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Figure 43. With and Without Reference Scaling
P2.22
Output
Frequency
Output
Frequency
Max. Frequency P1.2
Max. Frequency P1.2
Ref. Scaling Max. Value (P2.22)
P2.21
Analog
Input [V]
Min. Frequency P1.1
0
10
With Reference Scaling
(Reference Scaling)
136
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Analog
Input [V]
Min. Frequency P1.1
0
10
With Reference Scaling
(No scaling used [P2.21 = 0])
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P3.1
143
Start/Stop Logic
1, 2, 3, 4
For the DI function, we use Terminal programming method to function (TTF), where
there is a fixed input or output to define a certain function for.
0
Application RO/RW
RW
P3.2: DI closed contact = start forward P3.3: DI closed contact = start reverse
Figure 44. Start Forward / Start Reverse
Output
Frequency
FWD
Stop Function
(P7.10) = Coasting
t
REV
DIN1
DIN2
1
1
2
3
P3.2: DI closed contact = start /open contact = stop P3.3: DI closed contact =
reverse / open contact = forward
Figure 45. Start, Stop and Reverse
FWD
Output
Frequency
Stop Function
(P7.10) = Coasting
t
REV
DIN1
DIN2
Notes
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority.
2 When the DIN1 contact opens the direction of rotation starts to change.
3 If Start forward (DIN1) and Start reverse (DIN2) signals are active simultaneously the Start forward
signal (DIN1) has priority.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
137
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P3.1
143
2 P3.2: DI closed contact = start / open contact = stop P3.3: DI closed contact = 1, 2, 3, 4
start enabled / open contact = start disabled and drive stopped if running Motor
direction keeps forward
RW
3 Three-wire connection (pulse control): P3.2: DI changes from open to closed =
start pulse P3.3: DI changes from closed to open = stop pulse P3.5: DI closed
contact = reverse/ open contact = forward
Figure 46. Start Pulse / Stop Pulse
Output
Frequency
Stop Function
(P7.10) = Coasting
If Start and Stop pulses are
simultaneous the Stop pulse
overrides the Start pulse
t
REV
DIN1
Start
DIN2
Stop
P3.2
190
Start Signal 1
Signal selection 1 for the start/stop logic. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P3.3
191
Start Signal 2
Signal selection 2 for the start/stop logic. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P3.4
881
Thermistor Input Sel
This parameter defines DIN7, and DIN8 is digital input or thermistor input.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P3.5
198
Reverse
Allows for switching the direction of the motor when using 3 wire start/stop logic.
Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Ext. Fault Close
1, 2, 3, 4
Allows for external input causing drive to fault. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Contact Open = Forward direction.
Contact Close = Reverse direction.
P3.6
192
Closed contact = external fault.
Open contact = no external fault.
P3.7
193
Ext. Fault Open
1, 2, 3, 4
Allows for external input causing drive to fault. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed contact = no external fault.
Open contact = external fault.
138
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P3.8
200
Fault Reset
1, 2, 3, 4
Allows for external fault reset input. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
DI change from open contact to closed contact: reset fault.
P3.9
194
Run Enable
1, 2, 3, 4
Allows for safety start input that is required along with start command for frequency
converter to turn on output. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal
inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact = Start of motor enabled.
Open contact = Start of motor disabled.
P3.10
205
Preset Speed B0
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P3.11
206
Preset Speed B1
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P3.12
207
Preset Speed B2
Preset bit select inputs to select preset speed reference values. Validating three
digital inputs will allow for seven preset speeds to be obtained. When switching
between inputs it will follow the acceleration and deceleration time. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
B slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Figure 47. Activation of Fixed Frequencies
f
(Hz)
15 Hz
10 Hz
5 Hz
0 Hz
t (s)
DI3
B0
B0
DI4
B1
DI1
FWD
B0
B1
Fixed Frequency
Input (Binary)
Fixed Frequency
B0
B1
B2
(Factory setting)
X
—
—
Preset Speed 1, P12.1 = 5 Hz
—
X
—
Preset Speed 2, P12.2 = 10 Hz
X
X
—
Preset Speed 3, P12.3 = 15 Hz
—
—
X
Preset Speed 4, P12.4 = 20 Hz
X
—
X
Preset Speed 5, P12.5 = 25 Hz
—
X
X
Preset Speed 6, P12.6 = 30 Hz
X
X
X
Preset Speed 7, P12.7 = 35 Hz
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
139
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P3.13
550
PID1 Control Enable
2, 3, 4
Allows for activating PID1 control mode when it is not set as a reference P1.1.19 or
P1.1.20. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Contact Close: Enables PID 1 control mode.
P3.14
553
PID2 Control Enable
Allows for activating PID2 control mode. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
3, 4
RW
Contact Close: Enables PID 2 control mode.
P3.15
195
Accel/Decel Time Set
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects between accel/decel time 1 and accel/decel time 2. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer
Channel X.
RW
Closed contact = 2nd set of acc/dec time applied.
Open contact = 1st set of acc/dec time applied.
P3.16
201
Accel/Decel Prohibit
1, 2, 3, 4
Disables the ability to change speed. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: drive output frequency cannot rise or fall, it keeps on current output.
P3.17
215
No Access To Param
1, 2, 3, 4
Locks out the ability to change parameters. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: all writable parameters cannot be edited.
P3.18
203
Accel Pot Value
4
Motor Potentiometer increases reference value till contact opens. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer
Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: Potentiometer value keeps on rising.
P3.19
204
Decel Pot Value
Motor Potentiometer decreases reference value till contact opens. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B
slot, or Timer Channel X.
4
RW
4
RW
Closed contact: Potentiometer value keeps on falling.
P3.20
216
Reset Pot Zero
Sets Motor Potentiometer reference value to zero till contact opens. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed contact: Potentiometer value reset to zero.
P3.21
196
Remote Control
1, 2, 3, 4
Selection allows for external control panel to control frequency converters control
place. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed Contact: force to remote control.
140
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P3.22
197
Local Control
1, 2, 3, 4
Selection allows for external control panel to control frequency converters control
place. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: force to local control.
P3.23
209
Remote1/2 Select
Selection allows for switching between Remote control 1 and control 2. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on-board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot. DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B
slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Closed contact: remote2 is selected as control source.
Open contact: remote1 is selected as control.
P3.24
217
Second Motor Para Select
2, 3, 4
Selection allows for switching between motor parameter set 1 and set 2. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B
slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: the 2nd motor parameters are applied.
P3.25
218
Bypass Start
2, 3, 4
Selection allows for switching between bypass and drive modes. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer
Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: switch to bypass.
Open contact: switch to drive.
P3.26
202
DC Brake Enable
1, 2, 3, 4
Selection enables DC brake on a closed contact. Different settings: DigiIN:X
indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: DC brake function is enabled.
P3.27
219
Smoke Mode
2, 3, 4
Selection enables the smoke purge preset. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: drive is in smoke purge mode.
P3.28
220
P3.29
221
Fire Mode
Selection enables drive into fire mode where faults will be ignored and preset
speeds are given for reference. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
2, 3, 4
RW
Fire Mode Ref Select
2, 3, 4
Selection allows for switching between fire mode speed reference 1 and reference
2. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: drive is in fire mode. Ignores all the faults.
Closed contact: drive output reference frequency selection 2.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
141
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P3.30
351
PID1 Set Point Sel
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.31
352
PID2 Set Point Sel
Selection allows for selecting between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 when in the PID
control mode. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
3, 4
RW
Closed contact: setpoint2 is selected for PID1.
Open contact: setpoint1 is selected for PID1.
P3.32
199
Jog Enable
1, 2, 3, 4
Selection enables the jog frequency reference. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: drive is under jog mode.
P3.33
224
Start Timer 1
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.34
225
Start Timer 2
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.35
226
Start Timer 3
2, 3, 4
Selection enables the timer functions to begin counting. Different settings: DigiIN:X
indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: Timer1,Timer2 or Timer3 will be started.
P3.36
208
AI Ref Source Select
1, 2, 3, 4
Selection switches between AI1 and AI2 reference signals. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer
Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: AI2 is selected for reference source.
Open contact: AI1 is selected for reference source.
P3.37
210
Motor Interlock 1
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.38
211
Motor Interlock 2
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.39
212
Motor Interlock 3
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.40
213
Motor Interlock 4
2, 3, 4
RW
P3.41
214
Motor Interlock 5
2, 3, 4
Selects inputs that are allowed to verify aux motors are connected to allow them to
run. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
RW
Closed contact: motor interlock signal activated.
Open contact: motor interlock signal unactivated.
P3.42
747
Emergency Stop
Function disables the frequency converter from running the motor. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B
slot, or Timer Channel X.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
2, 3, 4
RW
Contact Open: Disables the ability for the motor to Run.
Contact Close: Enables the ability for the motor to Run.
P3.43
1246
BypassOverLoad
Function faults frequency converter when using an overload block input. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B
slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed contact: motor is over load in bypass.
Use TTF method to realize the above functions.
142
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P3.44
2118
Fire Mode Reverse
2, 3, 4
Function allows motor to run in reverse when in fire mode. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on-board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot and DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot or Timer
Channel X.
RW
P4.1
227
AO1 Mode
Selects the analog output mode for AO1 current or voltage.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.2
146
AO1 Function
Selects the desired function for the AO1 terminal 22.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Standard
MultiPump
and Fan
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
6 = Motor Power—calculated motor power (0–Pnmotor)
7 = Motor Voltage—output motor voltage (0–Unmotor)
8 = DC Bus Voltage—DC bus voltage level (0–1000V)
9 = PID1 Setpoint—PID setpoint value (setpoint min–setpoint max)
10 = PID1 Feedback1—PID actual value 1 (feedback1 min–feedback1 max)
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
11 = PID1 Feedback2—PID actual 2 value (feedback2 min–feedback2 max)
12 = PID1 Control Error Value—PID error value
13 = PID1 Control O/P—PID controller output
14 = PID2 Setpoint—PID setpoint value (setpoint min–setpoint max)
15 = PID2 Feedback1—PID actual value 1 (feedback1 min–feedback1 max)
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = PID2 Feedback2—PID actual 2 value (feedback2 min–feedback2 max)
17 = PID2 Control Error Value—PID error value
18 = PID2 Control O/P—PID controller output
19 = AI1—Analog input 1
20 = AI2—Analog input 2
—
—
—
■
■
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
21 = O/P Frequency—Output frequency (–2 to +2x nominal frequency)
22 = Motor Torque—Motor output torque (–2 to +2x Tnmotor)
23 = Motor Power—Motor calculated power (–2 to +2x Pnmotor)
24 = PT100 Temp—Thermistor input temperature
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Application—Function
0 = Not used—no function
1 = O/P Frequency—frequency output to motor (0–Fmax)
2 = Frequency Ref—reference frequency (Fmin–Fmax)
3 = Motor Speed—motor speed (0–Motor Nominal Speed)
4 = Motor Current—output motor current (0–Inmotor)
5 = Motor Torque—motor torque (0–Tnmotor)
P4.3
Application RO/RW
149
AO1 Minimum
1, 2, 3, 4
Defines the signal minimum to be either 0 mA or 4 mA (AO1 mode = 0–20 mA); 0V
or 2V (AO1 mode = 0–10V). Note the difference in analog output scaling in ID311
(Figure 39).
0
Set minimum value to 0V/0 mA
1
Set minimum value to 2V/4 mA
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
143
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P4.4
147
AO1 Filter Time
1, 2, 3, 4
Defines the filtering time for the analog output signal. Setting this parameter value to
0.00 will deactivate filtering.
RW
Figure 48. Analog Output Filtering
AI
AO
100%
63%
P2.5
P2.15
P4.4
P4.11
P4.5
150
t (s)
AI1
AI2
AO1
AO2
Notes
Analog signal with faults (unfiltered).
Filtered analog signal.
Filter time constant at 63% of the set value.
AO1 Scale
Scaling factor for analog output.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Figure 49. Analog Output Scaling
Analog
Output
Current
P4.5
P4.12 = 200%
20 mA
P4.5
P4.12 = 100%
12 mA
P4.5
P4.12 = 50%
10 mA
Max. Value
of Signal
Selected
by P4.3
P4.10
P4.3
P4.10 = 1
4 mA
P4.3
P4.10 = 0
0 mA 0
P4.6
148
0.5
1.0
AO1 Inversion
Inverts the analog output signal:
Maximum output signal = Minimum set value.
Minimum output signal = Maximum set value.
Figure 50. Analog Output Invert
Analog Output Current
20 mA
12 mA
P4.5
P4.12 = 50%
10 mA
P4.5
P4.12 = 100%
Selected with
P4.3/P4.10
4 mA
P4.5/P4.12
= 200%
0 mA
0
144
0.5
1.0
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P4.7
375
AO1 Offset
Add –100.0 to 100.0% to the analog output.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.8
228
AO2 Mode
Selects the analog output mode for AO2 current or voltage.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.9
229
AO2 Function
Selects the desired function for the AO1 terminal 24, see P4.2 for settings.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.10
232
AO2 Minimum
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.11
230
AO2 Filter Time
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.12
233
AO2 Scale
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.13
231
AO2 Inversion
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P4.14
234
AO2 Offset
See AO1 parameters.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.1
151
DO1 Function
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.2
152
RO1 Function
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.3
153
RO2 Function
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
145
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P5.4
538
RO3 Function
1, 2, 3, 4
Function
Standard
MultiPump
and Fan
Not operational
Frequency converter is ready for operations
Frequency converter is running motor
A fault trip has occurred on NO contact close
A fault trip has not occurred on NO contact close
Warning exists in frequency converter
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
6 = Reverse
7 = At speed
8 = Zero frequency
9 = Frequency Limit1 supervision
10 = Frequency Limit2 supervision
Reverse command has been activated
Output frequency has reached reference
Motor output is at zero frequency
Frequency limit1 achieved
Frequency limit2 achieved
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
11 = PID1 supervision
12 = PID2 supervision
13 = Over heat warning
14 = Over current regulator
15 = Over voltage regulator
PID1 controller level achieved
PID2 controller level achieved
Drive over heat has occurred
Over current controller activated
Over voltage controller activated
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = Under voltage regulator
17 = 4 mA fault
18 = External brake
19 = External brake inverter
20 = Torque limit supervision
Under voltage controller activated
4 mA reference fault
External brake activated on contact close
External brake non-activate on contact close
Torque limit value achieved
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
21 = Reference limit supervision
22 = Control from IO
23 = Unrequired rotation direction
24 = Thermal fault
25 = Fire mode
Reference limit achieved
Control place I/O is activated
Active direction is different than reference direction
Frequency converter thermal fault
Fire mode is activated
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
26 = Bypass running
27 = External fault
28 = Remote control
29 = Jog speed
30 = Motor thermal protection
Bypass mode is activated
External fault input is activated
Remote control place is activated
Jog preset speed mode is activated
Motor calculated temperature fault activated
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
31 = Fieldbus input1
32 = Fieldbus input2
33 = Fieldbus input3
34 = Fieldbus input4
35 = Damper control
—
—
—
—
Damper control input is activated
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
36 = Timer1 status
37 = Timer2 status
38 = Timer3 status
39 = Emergency stop
40 = Power limit supervision
Timer1 activated
Timer2 activated
Timer3 activated
Emergency stop input activated
Power limit value achieved
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
41 = Temperature limit supervision
42 = Analog input supervision
43 = Motor1 control
44 = Motor2 control
45 = Motor3 control
Temperature limit value achieved
Analog limit value achieved
Auxiliary motor1 activated
Auxiliary motor2 activated
Auxiliary motor3 activated
■
■
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
46 = Motor4 control
47 = Motor5 control
48 = Logic fulfilled
49 = PID1 sleep
50 = PID2 sleep
Auxiliary motor4 activated
Auxiliary motor5 activated
Logic function is activated
PID1 controller sleep mode active
PID2 controller sleep mode active
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
—
■
—
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Application
0 = Not used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault inverted
5 = Warning
146
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P5.4
538
RO3 Function, continued
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
MultiPump
and Fan
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
■
Out of operation
■
Frequency converter is ready for operation
Frequency converter is operating (motor is running)■
■
A fault trip has occurred
■
A fault trip has not occurred
■
Always if a warning exists
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
The reverse command has been selected
The output frequency has reached the set
reference
8 = Zero frequency
Motor output is at zero frequency
9 = Frequency Limit1 supervision Supervision for frequency limit1
10 = Frequency Limit2 supervision Supervision for frequency limit2
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
11 = PID1 supervision
12 = PID2 supervision
13 = Over heat warning
14 = Over current regulator
15 = Over volt regulator
Supervision for PID1 controller
Supervision for PID2 controller
Drive over heat has occurred
Over current regular is enabled
Over volt regular is enabled
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = Under volt regulator
17 = 4 mA fault
18 = External brake
19 = External brake inverter
20 = Torque limit supervision
Under volt regular is enabled
4 mA fault has occurred
External brake is working
External brake isn’t working
Supervision for torque limit
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
21 = Reference limit supervision
22 = Control from IO
23 = Unrequired rotation direction
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
24 = Thermal fault
25 = Fire mode
Supervision for reference limit
I/O is the control place
The active direction isn’t the same with the
reference direction
Thermal fault has occurred
Drive is in fire mode
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
26 = Bypass running
27 = External fault
28 = Remote control
29 = Jog speed
30 = Motor thermal protection
Drive is in bypass mode
External fault has occurred
Remote is the control place
Drive is in jog mode
Motor is thermal protected
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
31 = Fieldbus input1
32 = Fieldbus input2
33 = Fieldbus input3
34 = Fieldbus input4
35 = Damper control
—
—
—
—
Drive is in damper control
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
36 = Timer1 status
37 = Timer2 status
38 = Timer3 status
39 = Emergency stop
40 = Power limit supervision
The status of timer1
The status of timer2
The status of timer3
Emergency stop has occurred
Supervision for power limit
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
41 = Temperature limit supervision
42 = Analog input supervision
43 = Motor1 control
44 = Motor2 control
45 = Motor3 control
Supervision for temperature limit
Supervision for analog input
Motor1 is controlled
Motor2 is controlled
Motor3 is controlled
■
■
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
46 = Motor4 control
47 = Motor5 control
48 = Logic fulfilled
49 = PID1 sleep
50 = PID2 sleep
Motor4 is controlled
Motor5 is controlled
The status of logic function
PID1 controller is in sleep mode
PID2 controller is in sleep mode
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
—
■
—
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Setting Value
Signal Content
0 = Not used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault inverted
5 = Warning
6 = Reverse
7 = At speed
Standard
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
147
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P5.5
154
Freq Limit 1 Supv
Selects how the Frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.6
155
0
No supervision
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
3
Brake-on control (Application 4 only)
Freq Limit 1 Supv Val.
Selects the frequency value supervised by P1.5.5.
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (P1.5.6), this function generates
a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 or
RO3 depending on the settings of P1.5.1 to P1.5.2, P1.5.3, and P1.5.4.
Figure 51. Supervision Function
f [Hz]
P5.5 = 2
P5.6
t
P5.7
P5.8
157
158
Example: 21 RO1
21 RO1
21 RO1
22 RO1
22 RO1
22 RO1
23 RO1
23 RO1
23 RO1
Freq Limit 2 Supv
Selects how the Frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
0
No limit
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
3
Brake-off control (Application 4 only)
4
Brake-on/-off control (Application 4 only)
Freq Limit 2 Supv Val.
Selects the frequency value supervised by P5.7. See Figure 51.
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (P5.7), this function generates a
warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 or
RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.9
P5.10
159
160
Torque Limit Supv
Selects how the frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
0
No limit
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
3
Brake-off control (Application 4 only)
Torque Limit Supv Val.
Set here the torque value to be supervised by P5.9.
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (P5.10), this function generates
a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 or
RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
148
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P5.11
161
Ref Limit Supv
Selects how the frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.12
162
0
No supervision
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
Ref Limit Supv Val
The frequency value to be supervised by P5.11.
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (P5.12), this function generates
a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 or
RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.13
163
Ext Brake Off Delay
4
RW
P5.14
164
Ext Brake On Delay
4
The function of the external brake can be timed to the start and stop control signals
with these parameters. See Figure 52.
RW
The brake control signal can be programmed via digital output DO1 or via one of the
relay outputs RO1, RO2 and RO3; see P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
Figure 52. External Brake Control
a)
b)
tOFF = P5.13
External
BRAKE: OFF
ON
tOFF = P5.13
tON = P5.14
DO1/RO1/
RO2/RO3
tON = P5.14
DO1/RO1/
RO2/RO3
DIN1: START
PULSE
DIN1: RUN FWD
STOP
DIN2: RUN REV
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ON
t
DIN2: STOP
PULSE
t
a) Start/Stop Logic Selection, P3.1 = 0, 1 or 2
b) Start/Stop Logic Selection, P3.1 = 3
P5.15
P5.16
165
166
Temp Limit Supv
Selects how the frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
0
No supervision
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
Temp Limit Supv Val
This temperature value is supervised by P5.15.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
If the temperature of the frequency converter unit falls below or exceeds the set
limit (P5.16), this function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1
or via a relay output RO1, RO2 or RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2,
P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.17
167
Power Limit Supv
Selects how the frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
0
No supervision
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
149
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P5.18
168
Power Limit Supv Val
This power value is supervised by P5.17.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
If the calculated power value falls below or exceeds the set limit (P5.18), this
function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay
output RO1, RO2 or RO3, depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.19
P5.20
P5.21
170
171
172
AI Supv Select
Selects analog signal to use for the AI supervision.
0
Analog reference from AI1 (terminals 2 and 3, e.g., potentiometer)
1
Analog reference from AI2 (terminals 4 and 5, e.g., transducer)
AI Limit Supv
Selects how the frequency converter functions upon the value setting.
0
No supervision
1
Low limit supervision
2
High limit supervision
AI Limit Supv Val
The value of the selected analog input to be supervised by P5.20.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
If the value of the selected analog input goes under/over the set limit (P5.21), this
function generates a warning message through the digital output or the relay outputs
depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.22
1346
PID1 Superv Enable
2, 3, 4
RW
P5.23
1347
PID1 Superv Upper Limit
2, 3, 4
RW
P5.24
1349
PID1 Superv Lower Limit
2, 3, 4
RW
P5.25
1351
PID1 Superv Delay
2, 3, 4
RW
P5.26
1408
PID2 Superv Enable
3, 4
RW
P5.27
1409
PID2 Superv Upper Limit
3, 4
RW
P5.28
1411
PID2 Superv Lower Limit
3, 4
RW
P5.29
1413
PID2 Superv Delay
3, 4
Upper and lower limits around the reference are set. When the actual value goes
above or below these, a counter starts counting up toward the Delay. When the
actual value is within the allowed area, the same counter counts down instead. After
the delay time it will turn on an relay output value.
RW
P5.30
2111
RO1 On Delay
Delay time for RO1 to turn on.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.31
2112
RO1 Off Delay
Delay time for RO1 to turn off.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.32
2113
RO2 On Delay
Delay time for RO2 to turn on.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.33
2114
RO2 Off Delay
Delay time for RO2 to turn off.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.34
2115
RO3 On Delay
Delay time for RO3 to turn on.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.35
2116
RO3 Off Delay
Delay time for RO3 to turn off.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P5.36
2117
RO3 Reverse
Inverts the operation of RO3.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
150
1
Not Inverted
2
Inverted
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P6.1
751
Logic Function Select
4
The logic function enables you to link both parameters P6.2(A) and P6.3 (B) logically
with each other. The result (LOG) can then be assigned to the digital outputs DO,
RO1, RO2 and RO3. The type of operation is defined in parameter P6.1:
0
AND
1
OR
2
XOR
Application RO/RW
RW
P6.2
752
Logic Operation Input A
Input A for Logic function calculation defined in P6.1.
4
RW
P6.3
753
Logic Operation Input B
Input B for Logic function calculation defined in P6.1.
4
RW
P7.1
138
Remote 2 Control Place
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects where the drive will look for the 2nd start command. I/O terminals would be
from the Digital hardwired inputs. Fieldbus would be a communication bus. Keypad
will indicate what mode is selected. Digital input will select between control place 1
and control place 2.
RW
P7.2
139
Remote 2 Reference
Selects what frequency reference source to look at when in the Remote 2 control
mode.
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
Standard
MultiPump
and Fan
MultiPID
MultiPurpose
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
6 = Keypad—keypad reference (P1.7.3)
7 = Fieldbus Ref—reference sent of communication bus
8 = Motor Pot—selects digital inputs for digital inputs to increase/decrease speed
9 = Max Frequency—maximum frequency value (P1.1.2)
10 = AI1+AI2—sums the analog input values
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
11 = AI1–AI2—subtracts the analog inputs AI1 from AI2
12 = AI2–AI1—subtracts the analog inputs AI2 from AI1
13 = AI1*AI2—multiplies analog inputs AI1 and AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2—selects analog inputs based off of digital input
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the least value
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
16 = Max (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the higher value
17 = PID1 Control—selects the PID calculation for output to maintain reference value
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
Application—Selection
0 = AI1—analog input on terminals 2–3
1 = AI2—analog input on terminals 4–5
2 = Slot A: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot A
3 = Slot B: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot B
4 = AI1 joystick—analog input on terminals 2–3, used for joystick control
5 = AI2 joystick—analog input on terminals 4–5, used for joystick control
P7.3
141
Keypad Reference
1, 2, 3, 4
The frequency reference can be adjusted from the keypad with this parameter. This
parameter is linked to R1.12 Keypad reference in the operate menu.
RW
P7.4
116
Keypad Direction
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Keypad Stop
1, 2, 3, 4
To make the STOP button a “hotspot” that always stops the drive regardless of the
selected control place. Set the value of this parameter to Always Enabled for being
used in local and remote. Enable - Keypad operation activates the stop button only in
keypad mode.
RW
P7.5
114
0
Forward: The rotation of the motor is forward when the keypad is the active
control place.
1
Reverse: The rotation of the motor is reversed when the keypad is the active
control place.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
151
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P7.6
117
Jog Reference
Defines the jogging speed selected with the digital input that can be programmed
for Jogging speed.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
This parameter’s value is automatically limited between minimum and maximum
frequency (P1.1.1 and P1.1.2).
P7.7
156
Motor Pot Ramp Time
Defines the speed of change of the motor potentiometer reference value.
4
RW
P7.8
169
Motor Pot Ref Reset
4
Defines how the reference signal is handled on shutting down frequency converter
output or powering down the frequency converter.
RW
P7.9
252
0
No reset
1
Memory reset in stop and power down
2
Memory reset in power down
Start Mode
0
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Ramp: The frequency converter starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set
reference frequency within the set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting
friction may cause prolonged acceleration times.)
1
Flying start: The frequency converter is able to start into a running motor by
applying a small voltage to the motor to search for the frequency corresponding
to the speed the motor is running at. Searching starts from the maximum
frequency toward the actual frequency until the correct value is detected.
Thereafter, the output frequency will be increased/decreased to the set
reference value according to the set acceleration/deceleration parameters
Use this mode if the motor is coasting when the start command is given, with the
flying start.
P7.10
253
Stop Mode
0
Coasting: The motor coasts to a halt without any control from the frequency
converter after the Stop command. Slows based off the interia loss
1
Ramp: After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated
according to the set deceleration parameters. If the regenerated energy is high
and a faster deceleration is required, it may be necessary to use an external
braking resistor for faster deceleration
Enabled Normal stop: Ramp/Run
Disable stop: Coasting
P7.11
152
247
Ramp 1 Shape
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P7.12
248
Ramp 2 Shape
1, 2, 3, 4
The start and end of the acceleration and deceleration ramps can be smoothed with
these parameters. Setting a value of 0.0 gives a linear ramp shape that causes
acceleration and deceleration to react immediately to the changes in the reference
signal.
RW
Setting a value from 0.1 to 10 seconds for this parameter produces an S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration. The acceleration time is determined with P1.3 and P1.4 or
P7.13 and P7.14.
Figure 53. Acceleration/Deceleration (S-shaped)
Hz
P1.3, P1.4
(P7.13, P7.14)
P7.11 (P7.12)
P7.11 (P7.12)
t
P7.13
249
Accel Time 2
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.14
250
Decel Time 2
1, 2, 3, 4
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to accelerate
from the zero frequency to the set maximum frequency (P1.2). These parameters
provide the possibility to set two different acceleration/deceleration time sets for
one application. The active set can be selected with the programmable digital input.
RW
P7.15
256
Skip F1 Low Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.16
257
Skip F1 High Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.17
258
Skip F2 Low Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.18
259
Skip F2 High Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.19
260
Skip F3 Low Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
153
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P7.20
261
Skip F3 High Lim
1, 2, 3, 4
In some systems it may be necessary to avoid certain frequencies because of
mechanical resonance problems. With these parameters, limits are set for the “skip
frequency” regions. The frequency converter will skip the set frequencies, ramp
time will be the same. See Figure 54.
RW
Figure 54. Example of Skip Frequency Area Setting
Output
Frequency
(Hz)
P7.15
P7.17
P7.19
P7.16
P7.18
P7.20
Reference (Hz)
P7.21
264
PH Accel/Decel Ramp
Defines the acceleration/deceleration time when the output frequency is between
the selected prohibit frequency range limits. The ramping speed (selected
acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2) is multiplied with this factor. e.g., value 0.1
makes the acceleration time 10 times shorter than outside the prohibit frequency
range limits.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Power Loss Function
1, 2, 3, 4
This enables the drive to reduce output voltage to the motor to keep the drive up as
long as possible.
1 Enable power loss function
RW
Figure 55. Ramp Speed Scaling between Skip Frequencies
fout (Hz)
P7.21 = 0.2
P7.16
(P7.18; P7.20)
P7.15
(P7.17; P7.19)
P7.21 = 1.2
Time (s)
P7.22
267
0
P7.23
154
268
Disable power loss function
Power Loss Time
Allowable power loss max time before the drive shuts down. If AC input voltage
recovers before this time setting, drive will continue to work.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P7.24
2121
Currency
Sets the currency used for energy saving calculator.
0 $
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1
GBP
2
Eur
3
JPY
4
Rs
5
R$
6
Fr
7
Kr
P7.25
2122
Energy Cost
Local energy cost per kWh in the drives area.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P7.26
2123
Data Type
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects the format to view energy savings. The drive will take four recordings in an
hour and then calculate out averages for other values.
RW
P7.27
2124
P8.1
287
P8.2
107
0
Cumulative
1
Daily Avg
2
Monthly Avg
3
Yearly Avg
Energy Savings Reset
Resets the energy calculation.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Motor Ctrl Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Current Limit
1, 2, 3, 4
This parameter determines the maximum motor current allowed from the frequency
converter. The parameter value range differs from size to size.
RW
0
Frequency control: Motor is controlled by giving a frequency reference to it.
Voltage reference is calculated from scalar U/f ratio according to
preprogrammed curve (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz). The frequency
reference can be from I/O terminal, keypad, or communication bus.
1
Speed control: Motor is controlled by giving a frequency reference to it with slip
compensation. Voltage reference is calculated from scalar U/f ratio according to
preprogrammed curve (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz). The speed
reference can be from I/O terminal, keypad, or communication bus (accuracy
±0.5%).
5
Speed control (open loop): Similar to the standard Speed Control mode, but it
internally calculates for the amount of slip feedback from the motor.
6
Torque control (open loop): Motor is controlled based on a torque reference
given to the drive. Then, based on the motor load, the drive will maintain that
torque level.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
155
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P8.3
109
V/Hz optimization
Automatic torque boost
1, 2, 3, 4
The voltage to the motor changes automatically, which makes the motor produce
sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies. The voltage increase depends
on the motor type and power. Automatic torque boost can be used in applications
where starting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g., in conveyors.
Example:
What changes are required to start the load from 0 Hz?
First set the motor nominal values (Parameter group P1.1).
Option 1: Activate the Automatic torque boost.
Option 2: Programmable V/Hz curve.
To obtain the required torque, the zero point voltage and midpoint voltage/frequency
(in parameter group P1.8) need to be set, so that the motor can draw enough current
at the low frequencies. First set parameter P1.8.3 to Programmable V/Hz curve
(value 2).
Increase the zero point voltage P1.8.8 to get enough current at zero speed. Then set
the midpoint voltage P1.8.7 to 1.4142*P1.8.8 and the midpoint frequency P1.8.6 to
value P1.8.8/100%*P1.1.10.
Note: In high torque—low speed applications—it is likely that the motor will
overheat. If the motor has to run a prolonged time under these conditions, special
attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external cooling for the motor if the
temperature tends to rise too high.
156
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
P8.4
108
Parameter
Application RO/RW
V/Hz Ratio
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Linear
0
The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the constant flux
area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal voltage is
supplied to the motor. A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque
applications. This default setting should be used if there is no special need
for another setting.
Squared
1
The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form with the
frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal
voltage is supplied to the motor. The motor runs under magnetized below the
field weakening point and produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A
squared V/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of the
load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g., in centrifugal fans and
pumps.
Figure 56. Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage
U[V]
Un
P8.5
Default: Nominal
Voltage of the Motor
Field Weakening
Point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominal
Frequency of the
Motor
f [Hz]
Programmable V/Hz curve
2
The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points. A programmable
V/Hz curve can be used if the other settings do not satisfy the needs of the
application.
Figure 57. Programmable V/Hz Curve
U[V]
Un
P8.5
Default: Nominal
Voltage of the Motor
Field Weakening
Point
P8.7
(Default 100%)
Default: Nominal
Frequency of the
Motor
P8.8
(Default 0%)
P8.6
(Default 5 Hz)
f[Hz]
P8.4
Linear with flux optimization
3
The frequency converter starts to search for the minimum motor current in order
to save energy and lower the disturbance level and the noise. This function can
be used in applications with constant motor load, such as fans, pumps, etc.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
157
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P8.5
289
Field Weakening Point
The field weakening point is the output frequency at which the output voltage
reaches the set (P8.6) maximum value.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P8.6
290
Voltage at FWP
1, 2, 3, 4
Above the frequency at the field weakening point, the output voltage remains at the
set maximum value. Below the frequency at the field weakening point, the output
voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters. See P1.8.2, P1.8.3,
P1.8.6 and P1.8.7.
RW
When the parameters P1.1.9 and P1.1.10 (nominal voltage and nominal frequency of
the motor) are set, the parameters P1.8.4 and P1.8.5 are automatically set to the
corresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point and
the maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting P1.1.9 and
P1.1.10.
P8.7
291
V/Hz Mid Freq
1, 2, 3, 4
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with P8.4, this parameter defines
the middle point frequency of the curve. See Figure 57.
RW
P8.8
292
V/Hz Mid Volt
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with the P8.4, this parameter
defines the middle point voltage of the curve. See Figure 57.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P8.9
293
Zero Frequency Volt
1, 2, 3, 4
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with the P1.8.3, this parameter
defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See Figure 57.
RW
P8.10
288
Switching Frequency
1, 2, 3, 4
Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency, but the amount of
heat dissipation increases. Increasing the switching frequency reduces the capacity
of the frequency converter unit.
RW
For protection against thermal overload, the switching frequency automatically is
reduced in the fact that the ambient temperature is high as well as high load
currents.
P8.11
1665
Sine Filter Enable
1,2,3,4
Enables the frequency converter to have a sine filter connected to the output motor
leads.
RW
P8.12
294
Overvolt Contr
1, 2, 3, 4
These parameters allow the overvoltage controllers to be switched out of operation.
This may be useful, for example, if the main supply voltage varies more than –15%
to +10% and the application will not tolerate this overvoltage. In this case, the
regulator controls the output frequency taking the supply fluctuations into account.
RW
0
Controller switched off
1
Controller switched on
P8.13
298
Load Drooping
4
The drooping function enables speed drop as a function of load. This parameter sets
that amount corresponding to the nominal torque of the motor.
RW
P8.14
299
Identification
4
With this parameter, the drive will identify the motor and adjust tuning parameters to
improve starting torque and closed loop current control. Upon running this operation
it will be active until test is performed and then set back to 0.
RW
0
Not active
1
Identification only stator resistor
2
Identification with run
3
Identification no run
P8.15
1574
Neg Frequency Limit
Frequency limit in the negative direction.
4
RW
P8.16
1576
Pos Frequency Limit
Frequency limit in the positive direction.
4
RW
158
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P8.17
1585
Frequency Ramp Out Filter Time Constant
Filter time used when ramping the drive to a stop.
1,2,3,4
RW
P8.18
1591
Speed Error Filter Time Constant
Speed control filter time in open loop speed control mode.
4
RW
P8.19
1592
Speed Error Band Stop Frequency
Stop frequency band when in speed control mode.
4
RW
P8.20
1593
Speed Control Kp
Open loop speed control gain.
4
RW
P8.21
1594
Speed Control Ti
Open loop speed control integral time.
4
RW
P8.22
1595
Speed Control Kp at Field Weakening
Open loop speed control gain at Field Weakening Point.
4
RW
P8.23
1596
Speed Control Kp Below F0
Open loop speed control gain below 0 Hz.
4
RW
P8.24
1597
Speed Control F0
Open loop speed control at frequency 0.
4
RW
P8.25
1598
Speed Control F1
Open loop speed control at frequency 1.
4
RW
P8.26
1599
Speed Control Kp Below T0
Open loop speed gain below torque 0.
4
RW
P8.27
1600
Speed Control T0
Open loop speed torque 0.
4
RW
P8.28
1601
Speed Control Kp Filter Time Constant
Open loop speed control gain filter time.
4
RW
P8.29
1602
Motor Torque lImit
Torque limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
4
RW
P8.30
1603
Generator Torque Limit
Torque limit setting for generator.
4
RW
P8.31
1604
Torque Limit Forward
Torque limit setting in forward direction.
4
RW
P8.32
1605
Torque Limit Reverse
Torque limit setting in reverse direction.
4
RW
P8.33
1607
Motor Power Limit
Motor power limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
4
RW
P8.34
1608
Generator Power Limit
Generator power limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
4
RW
P8.35
1611
Acc Compensation Time Constant
Acceleration compensation time.
4
RW
P8.36
1612
Acc Compensation Filter Time Constant
Acceleration compensation filter time.
4
RW
P8.37
1620
Flux Reference
Reference selection for the amount of flux to output to the motor when using
advanced programming.
4
RW
P8.38
1621
Stop State Magnetization
Magnetization current % level when performing advanced programming of motor
identification.
4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
159
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P8.39
1622
Start Boost Rise Time
Acceleration time used with auto torque boost.
1,2,3,4
RW
P8.40
1623
Flux Current Ramp Time
Time to use the flux ramp level when advanced motor control is needed.
4
RW
P8.41
1624
Zero Speed Start Time
Zero speed delay time when starting the motor.
4
RW
P8.42
1625
Zero Speed Stop Time
Zero speed delay time when stopping the motor.
4
RW
P8.43
1630
Droop Control Filter Time Constant
Filter time when using droop control.
4
RW
P8.44
1631
Start Torque Selection
Selects where the startup torque reference comes from (either Start Memory,
Torque Reference, and Start Torque FWD/REV).
4
RW
P8.45
1632
Start Memory Start
4
Torque value is stored in memory. If you look at P8.47, you can select where the
torque on startup is given from. This is a preset value for both forward and reverse if
both are required to be equal.
RW
P8.46
1633
Start Torque Forward
Selects the amount of starting torque in the Forward direction.
4
RW
P8.47
1634
Start Torque Reverse
Selects the amount of starting torque Reverse direction.
4
RW
P8.48
1635
Start Torque Actual
Actual start torque.
4
RW
P8.49
1667
Startup Torque Time
4
This is the amount of time that the startup torque boost is active in either forward or
reverse during startup.
RW
P8.50
771
Stator Resistor
Motor stator resistor real value. This value is the stator winding resistance of the
windings in the motor. Value is measured when performing Identification (P8.14).
4
RW
P8.51
772
Rotor Resistor
4
Motor rotor resistor real value. This value is the rotor resistance of the motor. Value
is measured when performing Identification (P8.14).
RW
P8.52
773
Leak Inductance
Motor leakage inductance real value. This value is the amount of magnetic
inductance that does not link to a winding in the motor. Value is measured when
performing Identification (P8.14).
4
RW
P8.53
774
Mutual Inductance
4
Motor mutual inductance real value. This value is the amount of inductance between
2 sets of windings in the motor. Value is measured when performing Identification
(P8.14).
RW
P8.54
775
Excitation Current
4
Motor no-load current real value. This value is the amount of electrical current
required to generate a rotating magnetic field in the motor. Value is measured when
performing Identification (P8.14).
RW
160
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P9.1
306
4 mA Input Fault
1, 2, 3, 4
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4–20 mA reference
signal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA for 5 seconds or below 0.5 mA for 0.5
seconds. The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 or relay
outputs RO1 and RO2.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Warning, the frequency from 10 seconds back is set as reference
3
Warning, the Preset Frequency P9.2 is set as reference
4
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
5
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Application RO/RW
RW
P9.2
331
4 mA Fault Freq
When 4 mA fault happens, the output frequency of drive. Need to set P9.1 = 3.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P9.3
307
External Fault
1, 2, 3, 4
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signal in
the programmable digital inputs DIN3. The information can also be programmed into
digital output DO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
RW
P9.4
P9.5
P9.6
332
330
308
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Input Phase Fault
The input phase supervision ensures that the input phases of the frequency
converter have approximately equal currents.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Undervoltage Fault Resp
1, 2, 3, 4
Frequency converter monitors DC Bus Voltage if drops below set level will respond
corresponding to this setting.
RW
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
OutputPhaseFault
1, 2, 3, 4
Output phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have equal
currents, if phases are 5% away from one another frequency converter will respond
corresponding to this setting.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
161
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P9.7
309
Ground Fault
1, 2, 3, 4
Earth fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero. The
overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequency converter from
earth faults with high currents. Frequency Converter will cores pond the setting
below.
P9.8
P9.9
310
311
Application RO/RW
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Motor Therm Prot
1, 2, 3, 4
If tripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage based off the%
calculated motor temperature. Deactivating this protection, i.e., setting parameter to
0, will reset the thermal stage of the motor to 0%.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to ID506
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Motor Therm F0 Current
1, 2, 3, 4
The current can be set between 0–150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets the value
for thermal current at zero frequency. See Figure 58.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. If
an external fan is used, this parameter Different settings: 90% (or even higher).
Note: The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate data, P1.5 (nominal
current of the motor), not the drive’s nominal output current. The motor’s nominal
current is the current that the motor can withstand in direct on-line use without
being overheated.
If you change the parameter Nominal current of motor, this parameter is
automatically restored to the default value.
Setting this parameter does not affect the maximum output current of the drive,
which is determined by P1.16 alone.
Figure 58. Motor Thermal Current IT Curve
P
Cooling
Overload Area
100%
I
T
P9.9 = 40%
0
162
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
fn
f
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
RW
RW
RW
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P9.10
312
Motor Thermal Time
This time can be set between 1 and 200 minutes.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Stall Protection
1, 2, 3, 4
Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection. It protects the motor from short
time overload situations like a stalled shaft. This is customer selectable based off of
current level, frequency level and time.
RW
This is the thermal time constant of the motor; the larger the motor, the longer the
time constant. The time constant is the time within which the calculated thermal
stage has reached 63% of its final value.
The motor thermal time is specific to the motor design and it varies between
different motor manufacturers.
If the motor’s t6–time (t6 is the time in seconds the motor can safely operate at six
times the rated current) is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time
constant parameter can be set based on it. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermal
time constant in minutes is equal to 2 x t6. If the drive is in stop stage, the time
constant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. The cooling
in the stop stage is based on convection and the time constant is increased. See
Figure 59.
Figure 59. Motor Temperature Calculation
Motor
Temperature
Trip Area
105%
Fault/Warning
P9.8
Motor
Current
I/IT
Time Constant T*
Motor Temperature Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
Time
* Changes by motor size and adjusted with P9.10.
P9.11
313
0
No Action
1
Warning
2
Fault
3
Fault, Coast
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
163
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P9.12
314
Stall Current Limit
1, 2, 3, 4
The current can be set to 0.1–InMotor*2. For a stall stage to occur, the current must
have exceeded this limit. See Figure 60. The software does not allow entering a
greater value than InMotor*2. If P1.5, nominal motor current is changed, this
parameter is automatically restored to the default value (IL).
RW
Figure 60. Stall Characteristics Settings
I
Stall Area
P9.12
f
P9.14
P9.13
315
Stall Time Limit
This time can be set between 1.0 and 120.0s.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
This is the maximum time allowed for a stall stage. The stall time is counted by an
internal up/down counter. If the stall time counter value goes above this limit the
protection will cause a trip (see P9.11).
Figure 61. Stall Time Count
Stall Time Counter
Trip Area
P9.13
Trip/Warning
P9.11
Time
Stall
No Stall
P9.14
316
Stall Frequency Limit
The frequency can be set between 1–fmax (P1.1.2).
For a stall state to occur, the output frequency must have remained below this limit.
164
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P9.15
317
Underload Protection
1, 2, 3, 4
If tripping is set active, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage. Deactivating
the protection by setting the parameter to zero will reset the underload time counter
to zero.
P9.16
318
Application RO/RW
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Underload Fnom Torque
The torque limit can be set between 10.0–150.0% x TnMotor.
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
This parameter gives the value for the minimum torque allowed when the output
frequency is above the field weakening point. See Figure 62.
If you change P1.5, nominal motor current, this parameter is automatically restored
to the default value.
Figure 62. Setting of Minimum Load
Torque
P9.16
P9.17
Underload Area
f
5 Hz
P9.17
319
Field Weakening
Point P8.4
Underload F0 Torque
The torque limit can be set between 5.0–150.0% x TnMotor.
This parameter gives value for the minimum torque allowed with zero frequency.
See Figure 63.
If you change the value of P1.5, nominal motor current, this parameter is
automatically restored to the default value.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
165
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P9.18
320
Underload Time Limit
This time can be set between 2.0s and 600.0s.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
This is the maximum time allowed for an underload state to exist. An internal up/
down counter counts the accumulated underload time. If the underload counter
value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip according to P9.15. If the
drive is stopped, the underload counter is reset to zero. See Figure 63.
Figure 63. Underload Time Counter Function
Underload
Time Counter
Trip Area
Trip/ Warning
P0.15
Time
Underload
No Underload
P9.19
P9.20
333
750
Thermistor Fault Response
Setting the parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection. If used with motor
thermistors in the winding of the motor, P9.8 Motor Thermal Protection can
be deactivated.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Line Start Lockout
Determines the response of frequency converter starting motor on power cycle
if I/O run command is still active.
0
Response I/O command when power is on. No response to I/O commands
when control source is changed to I/O location
1
Do not respond I/O command when power is on. No response to I/O
commands when control source is changed to I/O location
2
Response I/O command when power is on. Respond to I/O command when
control source is changed to I/O location
3
Do not respond I/O command when power is on. Respond to I/O command
when control sources are changed to I/O location
P9.21
334
Fieldbus Fault Response
1, 2, 3, 4
This sets the response mode for the fieldbus fault when a fieldbus board is used and
communication is lost between the PLC and communication card. See P9.19.
RW
P9.22
335
OPTCard Fault Response
This sets the response mode for a board slot fault caused by a missing or failed
board not communicating to the Central Processor. See P9.19.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P9.23
1564
Unit Under Temp Prot
This protection sets the response to a low frequency converter temperature. See
P9.19.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
166
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P9.24
321
Wait Time
Defines the time before the frequency converter tries to automatically restart the
motor after the fault condition has been received.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P9.25
322
Trial Time
The Automatic restart function restarts the frequency converter when the faults
selected with P9.27 to P9.32 have cleared and the waiting time has elapsed.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Figure 64. Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts
Wait Time
Par. P9.23
Wait Time
Par. P9.23
Wait Time
Par. P9.23
Fault Trigger
Motor Stop Signal
Restart 1
Restart 2
Motor Start Signal
Trial Time
Par. P9.24
Supervision
Fault State Active
RESET/Fault Reset
Auto Function: (Trials = 2)
P9.27 to P9.32 determine the maximum number of automatic restarts during the trial
time set by P9.25. The time count starts from the first autorestart. If the number of
faults occurring during the trial time exceeds the values of P9.27 to P9.32 the fault
state becomes active. Otherwise the fault is cleared after the trial time has elapsed
and the next fault starts the trial time count again.
If a single fault remains during the trial time, a fault state is true.
P9.26
P9.27
323
324
Start Function
The Start function for Automatic restart is selected with this parameter. The
parameter defines the start mode:
0
Start with ramp
1
Flying start
2
Start according to P7.9
Undervoltage Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25 after an undervoltage trip.
>0 No automatic restart
>0 Number of automatic restarts after undervoltage fault. The fault is reset and the
drive is started automatically after the DC-link voltage has returned to the
normal level
P9.28
325
Overvoltage Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial
Time set by P9.25 after an overvoltage trip.
>0 No automatic restart after overvoltage fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after overvoltage fault trip. The fault is reset and
the drive is started automatically after the DC-link voltage has returned to the
normal level
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
167
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P9.29
326
Overcurrent Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Note: An IGBT temperature fault, Saturation Fault and Overcurrent Faults are
included as part of this fault.
>0 No automatic restart after overcurrent fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after an overcurrent trip, saturation trip or IGBT
temperature fault
P9.30
327
4 mA Fault Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25.
>0 No automatic restart after reference fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after the analog current signal (4–20 mA) has
returned to the normal level (>4 mA)
P9.31
329
Motor Temp Fault Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25.
>0 No automatic restart after Motor temperature fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after the motor temperature has returned to its
normal level
P9.32
328
External Fault Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25.
>0 No automatic restart after External fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after External fault trip
P9.33
336
Underload Attempts
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25.
>0 No automatic restart after an Underload fault trip
>0 Number of automatic restarts after an Underload fault trip
P9.34
P9.35
168
955
337
RTC Fault
RTC fault protection ensures the real time display is correct, the interval and timer
function can run normally.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
PT100 Fault Response
PT100 Thermistor protection used with motor thermistors to fault frequency
converter. If using thermistors P9.8 Motor Thermal Protection can be disabled.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P9.36
1256
Replace Battery Fault Response
1, 2, 3, 4
Sets how the frequency converter responds to a low voltage on the Real Time Clock
battery.
P9.37
P9.38
P9.39
1257
1678
2126
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
Application RO/RW
Replace Fan Fault Response
1, 2, 3, 4
Replace Fan Fault will show when the fan life is less than 2 months; remind user to
replace the fan.
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
IP Address Conflict Response
Indicates there is a conflict in the IP address assigned.
RW
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Cold Weather Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
With this parameter, you are able to enable the cold weather function of the drive,
causing the frequency converter’s under temp limit to drop from –10°C to –30°C.
This then enables a warmup feature when the frequency converter is between
–30°C and –20°C. The motor, when given a run command, will turn on for the Cold
Weather Timeout (ID1492) and output the Cold Weather Voltage (ID1491) at 0.5 Hz
to allow the motor to warm up. If it does not warm up above –20°C, after that the
time frequency converter will fault on Under temp fault. If the frequency converter
does go above –20°C, output will begin to follow reference.
RW
0
No response
1
Warning
2
Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
3
Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
0
No
1
Yes
P9.40
2127
Cold Weather Voltage Level
With this parameter, you are able to select the % of the motor voltage that is
output to the motor when in the cold weather warmup period.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P9.41
2128
Cold Weather Time Out
With this parameter, you are able to select the time limit that the frequency
converter will run in the warmup period.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P10.1
1294
PID1 Control Gain
Defines the gain of the PID Controller. If this value is set to 100% a change of
10% in the error value causes the controller output to change 10%.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.2
1295
PID1 Control ITime
Defines the integration time of the PID Controller. If this value is set to 1.00 sec,
a change of 10% in the error value causes the controller output to change by
10.00%/s. With value set to 0.0, frequency converter operates as PD controller.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.3
1296
PID1Control DTime
Defines the derivation time of the PID Controller. If this value is set to 1.00 sec, a
change of %10 in error value during 1.00 sec causes the control output to change
by %10.00. If value is set to 0.0, frequency converter operates as PI controller
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.4
1297
PID1 Process Unit
Defines the unit type for PID Feedback.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.5
1298
PID1 Process Unit Min
Minimum process unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
169
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P10.6
1300
PID1 Process Unit Min
Minimum process unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.7
1302
PID1 Process Unit Decimal
Decimal places in process unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.8
1303
PID1 Error Inversion
0 Normal, If feedback is less than setpoint, PID controller output increases
2, 3, 4
RW
1
Inverted, If feedback is less than setpoint, PID controller output decreases
P10.9
1304
PID1 Dead Band
PID Dead band around setpoint in process units. The PID output is locked if the
feedback stays within the deadband area for a delay.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.10
1306
PID1 Dead Band Delay
If the feedback stays within the dead band area for a delay time, output is locked.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.11
1307
PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
Keypad setpoint 1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.12
1309
PID1 Keypad Set Point 2
Keypad setpoint 2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.13
1311
PID1 Ramp Time
Defines the rising and falling ramp times for setpoint changes.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.14
1312
PID1 Set Point 1 Source
Defines source of the setpoint.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.15
1313
PID1 Set Point 1 Min
Defines Minimum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.16
1314
PID1 Set Point 1 Max
Defines Maximum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.17
1315
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Enable
Enable PID Set Point Sleep mode.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.18
1316
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq
Drive goes to sleep mode when the output frequency stays below this limit for a
time greater than that defined by parameter Sleep delay.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.19
1317
PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay
The minimum amount of time the frequency has to remain below the sleep level
before the drive is stopped.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.20
1318
PID1 Set Point 1 Wake-Up Level
Defines the level for the PID feedback value wake-up supervision. Uses selected
process units.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.21
1320
PID1 Set Point 1 Boost
The setpoint can be boosted with a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.22
1321
PID1 Set Point 2 Source
Defines source of the setpoint.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.23
1322
PID1 Set Point 2 Min
Defines Minimum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.24
1323
PID1 Set Point 2 Max
Defines Maximum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.25
1324
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Enable
Enable PID sleep function.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.26
1325
PID1 Set Point2 Sleep Freq
Drive goes to sleep mode when the output frequency stays below this limit for a
time greater than that defined by parameter Sleep delay.
2, 3, 4
RW
170
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P10.27
1326
PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay
The minimum amount of time the frequency has to remain below the sleep level
before the drive is stopped.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.28
1327
PID1 Set Point 2 Wake-Up Level
Defines the level for the PID feedback value wake-up supervision. Uses selected
process units.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.29
1329
PID1 Set Point 2 Boost
The setpoint can be boosted with a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.30
1330
PID1 Feedback Function
Choose a single signal used as feedback.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.31
1331
PID1 Feedback Gain
Define Gain associated with feedback.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.32
1332
PID1 Feedback 1 Source
Define where feedback signal is from.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.33
1333
PID1 Feedback 1 Min
Minimum Unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.34
1334
PID1 Feedback 1 Max
Maximum Unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.35
1335
PID1 Feedback 2 Source
Define where feedback signal is from.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.36
1336
PID1 Feedback 2 Min
Define feedback2 Minimum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.37
1337
PID1 Feedback 2 Max
Define feedback2 Maximum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.38
1338
PID1 Feedforward Func
Choose a single signal used as feed forward.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.39
1339
PID1 Feedforward Gain
Define feed forward gain.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.40
1340
PID1 Feedforward 1 Source
Define where feed forward signal is from.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.41
1341
PID1 Feedforward 1 Min
Define feed forward Minimum Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.42
1342
PID1 Feedforward 1 Max
Define feed forward Maximum Unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.43
1343
PID1 Feedforward 2 Source
Define where feed forward signal is from.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.44
1344
PID1 Feedforward 2 Min
Define feed forward2 Minimum Unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.45
1345
PID1 Feedforward 2 Max
Define feed forward2 Maximum Unit Value.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.46
1352
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Enable
Enables pressure loss compensation for setpoint 1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.47
1353
PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max
Value added proportionally to the frequency.
2, 3, 4
RW
P10.48
1354
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Enable
Enables pressure loss compensation for setpoint 2.
2, 3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
171
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P10.49
1355
PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Max
2, 3, 4
Value added proportionally to the frequency, setpoint compensation = comp max *
(output freq–min freq)/(max freq–min freq).
RW
Procedure for setting up PID Application:
Initially set PID Gain (P10.1) to 0.0% and set the PID I Time (P10.2) to 20 sec. Start
the frequency converter and verify if the setpoint is reached quickly while
maintaining stable operation of the system. If not increase the PID Gain (P10.1) until
the drive speed oscillates constantly. After this occurs reduce the PID Gain (P10.1)
slightly to reduce the oscillation. From here take the value found for PID Gain (P10.1)
to 0.5 times that value and reduce the PID I time (P10.2) until the feedback signal
oscillates again. Increase the PID I time (P10.2) until the oscillation stops, with that
value take it times 1.2 and use that value for the PID I time (P10.2). If signal noise is
seen at high frequency increase the filter time varies to filter the signal. If further
tuning is required refer to the table showing what is affected.
Figure 65. Setting up PID Application
Response
Rise Time
Overshoot
Increase PID Gain
Settling Time
Steady State Error
Decreases Error
Decrease Rise
Increases Overshoot
Not Affected
Increase PID1 Time Decrease Rise
Increases Overshoot
Increases Setting Eliminates Error
Increase PID0 Time Not Affected
Decreases Overshoot Decreases Setting Not Affected
Rise Time—the time required for the output to rise 90% of the desired level for
the first time.
Overshoot—the difference between the peak level and the steady state level.
Setting Time—time required for the system to converge to its steady state.
Steady State Error—the difference between the steady state level and the desired
output level.
Peak
Time
0.50
0.45
Overshoot
Desired
Amplitude
0.40
Steady State
Error
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
Settling Time
0.05
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Rise Time
P11.1
1356
PID2 Control Gain
See P10.1.
3, 4
RW
P11.2
1357
PID2 Control ITime
See P10.2.
3, 4
RW
P11.3
1358
PID2 Control DTime
See P10.3.
3, 4
RW
172
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P11.4
1359
PID2 Process Unit
See P10.4.
3, 4
RW
P11.5
1360
PID2 Process Unit Min
See P10.5.
3, 4
RW
P11.6
1362
PID2 Process Unit Max
See P10.6.
3, 4
RW
P11.7
1364
PID2 Process Unit Decimal
See P10.7.
3, 4
RW
P11.8
1365
PID2 Error Inversion
See P10.8.
3, 4
RW
P11.9
1366
PID2 Dead Band
See P10.9.
3, 4
RW
P11.10
1368
PID2 Dead Band Delay
See P10.10.
3, 4
RW
P11.11
1369
PID2 Keypad Set Point 1
See P10.11.
3, 4
RW
P11.12
1371
PID2 Keypad Set Point 2
See P10.12.
3, 4
RW
P11.13
1373
PID2 Ramp Time
See P10.13.
3, 4
RW
P11.14
1374
PID2 Set Point 1 Source
See P10.14.
3, 4
RW
P11.15
1375
PID2 Set Point 1 Min
See P10.15.
3, 4
RW
P11.16
1376
PID2 Set Point 1 Max
See P10.16.
3, 4
RW
P11.17
1377
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Enable
See P10.17.
3, 4
RW
P11.18
1378
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq
See P10.18.
3, 4
RW
P11.19
1379
PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay
See P10.19.
3, 4
RW
P11.20
1380
PID2 Set Point 1 Wake-Up Level
See P10.20.
3, 4
RW
P11.21
1382
PID2 Set Point 1 Boost
See P10.21.
3, 4
RW
P11.22
1383
PID2 Set Point 2 Source
See P10.22.
3, 4
RW
P11.23
1384
PID2 Set Point 2 Min
See P10.23.
3, 4
RW
P11.24
1385
PID2 Set Point 2 Max
See P10.24.
3, 4
RW
P11.25
1386
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Enable
See P10.25.
3, 4
RW
P11.26
1387
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq
See P10.26.
3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
173
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P11.27
1388
PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay
See P10.27.
3, 4
RW
P11.28
1389
PID2 Set Point 2 Wake-Up Level
See P10.28.
3, 4
RW
P11.29
1391
PID2 Set Point 2 Boost
See P10.29.
3, 4
RW
P11.30
1392
PID2 Feedback Func
See P10.30.
3, 4
RW
P11.31
1393
PID2 Feedback Gain
See P10.31.
3, 4
RW
P11.32
1394
PID2 Feedback 1 Source
See P10.32.
3, 4
RW
P11.33
1395
PID2 Feedback 1 Min
See P10.33.
3, 4
RW
P11.34
1396
PID2 Feedback 1 Max
See P10.34.
3, 4
RW
P11.35
1397
PID2 Feedback 2 Source
See P10.35.
3, 4
RW
P11.36
1398
PID2 Feedback 2 Min
See P10.36.
3, 4
RW
P11.37
1399
PID2 Feedback 2 Max
See P10.37.
3, 4
RW
P11.38
1400
PID2 Feedforward Func
See P10.38.
3, 4
RW
P11.39
1401
PID2 Feedforward Gain
See P10.39.
3, 4
RW
P11.40
1402
PID2 Feedforward 1 Source
See P10.40.
3, 4
RW
P11.41
1403
PID2 Feedforward 1 Min
See P10.41.
3, 4
RW
P11.42
1404
PID2 Feedforward 1 Max
See P10.42.
3, 4
RW
P11.43
1405
PID2 Feedforward 2 Source
See P10.43.
3, 4
RW
P11.44
1406
PID2 Feedforward 2 Min
See P10.44.
3, 4
RW
P11.45
1407
PID2 Feedforward 2 Max
See P10.45.
3, 4
RW
P11.46
1414
PID2 Set Point 1 Comp Enable
See P10.46.
3, 4
RW
P11.47
1415
PID2 Set Point 1 Comp Max
See P10.47.
3, 4
RW
P11.48
1416
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Enable
See P10.48.
3, 4
RW
P11.49
1417
PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Max
See P10.49.
3, 4
RW
174
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P12.1
105
Preset Speed 1
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.2
106
Preset Speed 2
Parameter values are automatically limited between the minimum and maximum
frequencies (P1.1, P1.2). Sets the desired frequency when input is applied.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.3
118
Preset Speed 3
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.4
119
Preset Speed 4
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.5
120
Preset Speed 5
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.6
121
Preset Speed 6
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P12.7
122
Preset Speed 7
1, 2, 3, 4
These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected. These parameter
values are automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency (P1.1
and P1.2).
RW
P13.1
295
Torque Limit
With this parameter you can set the torque limit control between 0.0–400.0%.
4
RW
P13.2
296
TorqLimCtrl P
This parameter defines the gain of the torque limit controller.
4
RW
P13.3
297
TorqLimCtrl I
This parameter determines the I-gain of the torque limit controller.
4
RW
P13.4
303
Torque Ref Sel
Defines the source for torque reference.
4
RW
0
Not used
1
AI1
2
AI2
3
SlotA:AI1
4
SlotB:AI1
5
AI1 joystick
6
AI2 joystick
7
Keypad Torque Ref
8
Fieldbus Ref
P13.5
782
Keypad Torque Ref
Keypad torque reference setpoint.
4
RW
P13.6
304
Torque Ref Max
4
RW
P13.7
305
Torque Ref Min
4
Scale the custom minimum and maximum levels for analog inputs within –300.0 to
300.0%.
RW
P13.8
300
Torque Ctrl Freq Min
Defines the frequency limit below which the frequency converter operates in the
frequency control mode.
4
RW
Because of the nominal slip of the motor, the internal torque calculation is inaccurate
at low speeds where it is recommended to use the frequency control mode.
P13.9
301
OL Torque Control P
Defines the P gain of the torque controller.
4
RW
P13.10
302
OL Torque Control I
Defines the I gain of the torque controller.
4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
175
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P13.11
1666
Torque Control Freq Max
4
With this parameter, the maximum frequency for the torque control can be selected.
0
Maximum frequency, P1.2
1
Selected frequency reference
2
Preset speed 7, P12.7
Application RO/RW
RW
P13.12
1636
Window Pos Width
Positive torque control width.
4
RW
P13.13
1637
Window Neg Width
Negative torque control width.
4
RW
P13.14
1638
Window Pos Off Limit
Positive torque off limit.
4
RW
P13.15
1639
Window Neg Off Limit
Negative torque off limit.
4
RW
P13.16
1640
Torque Reference Filter TC
Torque reference filter time.
4
RW
P13.17
1606
Pull Out Torque
Startup torque level in percentage.
4
RW
P13.18
1667
Startup Torque Time
4
Startup torque time limit for starting torque level in open loop torque control mode.
RW
P13.19
1684
Stop State Magnetization Time
Motor stop magnetization time upon stopping in open loop torque control mode.
4
RW
P14.1
254
DC-Brake Current
Defines the current injected into the motor during DC-braking.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P14.2
263
Start DC-Brake Time
1, 2, 3, 4
DC-brake is activated when the start command is given. This parameter defines the
time before the brake is released. After the brake is released, the output frequency
increases according to the set start function by P7.9.
RW
P14.3
262
Stop DC-Brake Frequency
1, 2, 3, 4
The output frequency at which the DC-braking is applied on stopping. See Figure 66.
RW
176
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P14.4
255
Stop DC-Brake Time
1, 2, 3, 4
Determines if braking is ON or OFF and the braking time of the DC-brake when the
motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brake depends on the stop function,
P7.10.
RW
>0.0 DC-brake is not used
>0.0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function, (P7.10). The
DC-braking time is determined with this parameter
Par. P7.10 = 0; Stop function = Coasting:
After the stop command, the motor coasts to a stop without control of the frequency
converter.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possible
time, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If
the frequency is ≥ the nominal frequency of the motor, the set value of parameter
P14.4 determines the braking time. When the frequency is ≤10% of the nominal, the
braking time is 10% of the set value of P14.4.
Figure 66. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Coasting
fout
fout
fn
fn
Output Frequency
Motor Speed
Output Frequency
0.1 x fn
DC-Braking ON
Motor Speed
DC-Braking ON
t
t
t = 0.1 x P14.4
t = 1 x P14.4
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Par. P7.10 = 1; Stop function = Ramp:
After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced according to the set
deceleration parameters, as fast as possible, to the speed defined with P14.3, where
the DC-braking starts.
The braking time is defined with P14.4. If high inertia exists, it is recommended to
use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration. See Figure 67.
Figure 67. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Ramp
fout
Motor Speed
Output Frequency
DC-Braking
P14.3
t
t = P14.4
RUN
STOP
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
177
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P14.5
251
Brake Chopper
1, 2, 3, 4
When the frequency converter is decelerating the motor, the inertia of the motor and
the load is fed into an external brake resistor. This enables the frequency converter
to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that of acceleration (provided that the
correct brake resistor has been selected).
0
Application RO/RW
RW
No brake chopper used
1 Brake chopper in use and tested when running. Can be tested also in READY
state
P14.6
266
2
External brake chopper (no testing)
3
Used and tested in READY state and when running
4
Used when running (no testing)
Flux Brake
Instead of DC braking, flux braking is a useful form of braking for motors <15 kW.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
When braking is needed, the frequency is reduced and the flux in the motor is
increased, which in turn increases the motor’s capability to brake. Unlike DC braking,
the motor speed remains controlled during braking.
The flux braking can be set ON or OFF.
0
Flux braking OFF
1
Flux braking ON
Note: Flux braking converts the energy into heat in the motor, and should be used
intermittently to avoid motor damage.
P14.7
519
Flux Brake Current
Defines the flux braking current value. This value can be set P1.5 and P1.16.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P15.1
535
Fire Mode Function
This parameter determines whether the fire mode function is determined by a
contact closure or contact opening on digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
2, 3, 4
RW
P15.2
536
0
Closing contact initiates fire mode function
1
Opening contact initiates fire mode function
FMRefSel Function
Setting this parameter to 1 enables the Fire Mode Frequency Reference 1 or Fire
Mode Frequency Reference 2 to be used as a reference in “Fire Mode” without
using a digital input.
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
P15.3
537
Fire Mode Min Frequency
This parameter sets the minimum output frequency for fire mode.
2, 3, 4
RW
P15.4
565
Fire Mode Freq Ref 1
This parameter sets the drive operating frequency for fire mode reference 1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P15.5
564
Fire Mode Freq Ref 2
This parameter sets the drive operating frequency for fire mode reference 2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P15.6
554
Smoke Purge Frequency
Frequency setting for Smoke Purge.
2, 3, 4
RW
P16.1
557
Motor Nom Current 2
The second motor set ln. Selected based off of a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P16.2
578
Motor Nom Speed 2
The second motor set nn. Selected based off of a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P16.3
579
Motor PF 2
The second motor set Fn. Selected based off of a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P16.4
580
Motor Nom Voltage 2
The second motor set pn. Selected based off of a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
178
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P16.5
581
Motor Nom Freq 2
The second motor set vn. Selected based off of a digital input.
2, 3, 4
RW
P16.6
1419
Stator Resistor 2
The second set of motor stator resistor real value.
4
RW
P16.7
1420
Rotor Resistor 2
The second set of motor rotor resistor real value.
4
RW
P16.8
1421
Leak Inductance 2
The second set of motor leakage inductance real value.
4
RW
P16.9
1422
Mutual Inductance 2
The second set of motor mutual inductance real value.
4
RW
P16.10
1423
Excitation Current 2
The second set of motor no-load current real value.
4
RW
P17.1
1418
Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter identifies whether or not to enter into bypass mode. The “Bypass”
soft key on keypad will show to start bypass.
RW
P17.2
544
Bypass Start Delay
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies the time delay between when the Start Signal is applied in
I/O or Fieldbus, to when the motor starts.
RW
P17.3
542
Auto Bypass
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur based on
Overvoltage Fault Auto Bypass P10.5 through Undervoltage Fault Auto Bypass P10.9
parameters below.
RW
0
Auto Bypass disabled
1
Auto Bypass enabled
P17.4
543
Auto Bypass Delay
This parameter specifies the time delay before an automatic switch to bypass, as
determined by Overvoltage Fault Auto Bypass P10.5 through Undervoltage Fault
Auto Bypass P10.9 parameters, will occur.
2, 3, 4
RW
P17.5
547
Overcurrent Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
overcurrent fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
RW
P17.6
P17.7
546
548
0
Auto bypass on overcurrent fault tries exceeded disabled, bypass once fault
happens
1
Auto bypass on overcurrent fault tries exceeded enabled, bypass after tries
exceed
IGBT FLT Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
IGBT fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0
Auto bypass on IGBT fault tries exceeded disabled
1
Auto bypass on IGBT fault tries exceeded enabled
4 mA FLT Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
loss of reference fault and auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0
Auto bypass on loss of reference fault tries exceeded disabled
1
Auto bypass on loss of reference fault tries exceeded enabled
RW
RW
Note: P1.7.1 (4 mA (Reference) Fault Auto Bypass) must be set to 4 or 5 (Fault).
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
179
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P17.8
545
Undervoltage Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
undervoltage fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
P17.9
549
Application RO/RW
0
Auto bypass on undervoltage fault tries exceeded disabled
1
Auto bypass on undervoltage fault tries exceeded enabled
Overvoltage Bypass Enable
2, 3, 4
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
overvoltage fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0
Auto bypass on overvoltage fault tries exceeded disabled
1
Auto bypass on overvoltage fault tries exceeded enabled
RW
RW
P18.1
342
Number of Motors
Total auxiliary number of motors/pumps used with the Multi-Pump System.
2, 3, 4
RW
P18.2
343
Bandwidth
2, 3, 4
Percentage of the setpoint defining when motor connection or removal will not take
place.
RW
P18.3
344
Bandwidth Delay
2, 3, 4
With feedback outside the bandwidth, this time must pass before pumps are added
or removed.
RW
P18.4
350
Interlock Enable
Input tells the frequency converter if a motor/pump is connected or not.
2, 3, 4
RW
P18.5
346
Include Freq Converter
Input tells the drive if the motor/pump contacted with frequency converter is
included in the auto change and interlock system.
2, 3, 4
RW
P18.6
345
Auto Change Enable
2, 3, 4
Autochange will rotate the starting order/priority of the motors in the system to get
equal run time on all the motors.
RW
P18.7
347
AutoChange Interval
Defines how often to rotate starting order of motors/pumps.
2, 3, 4
RW
P18.8
349
AutoChange Freq Limit
An autochange is done when the autochange interval has elapsed and the drive is
running below autochange frequency limit.
2, 3, 4
RW
P18.9
348
AutoChange Motor Limit
2, 3, 4
An auto change is done when the auto change interval has elapsed and the number
of running aux motors is less than auto change motor limit.
RW
Figure 68. AutoChange Interval and Limits
Autochange
Moment
Output
Frequency
P18.9 = 1
Max. Number of
Auxiliary Drives
P18.8
Autochange
Level,
Frequency
P18.7
Autochange Interval
P18.7
Autochange Interval
Time
Aux. Drive
1 Control
Aux. Drive
2 Control
180
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P18.10
483
Damper Start
This parameter determines the function of damper.
2, 3, 4
RW
0
Start standard start
1
Interlocked Start—To use this, a relay output, RO1–RO3, needs to be
programmed for selections 35 “Damper Control,” and a digital input DIN must
be programmed for selection “RunEn/INTLK.” The relay output is used to
energize an element of the driven system, such as a damper, seal water
solenoid, or a pre-lube pump. Upon a return acknowledgement contact closure
to the programmed digital input, the frequency converter will start
2
Interlock Time Start—This functions the same as the Interlocked Start, except
that if the return acknowledgement contact is not received within the Interlock
Timeout, a “prevent-up start” fault is displayed in keypad and the start
sequence will need to be restarted
3
Delay Start This start is similar to the Interlocked Start, except that a return
contact is not used. After the “Delay Time” following the relay output closure,
the frequency converter starts
P18.11
484
Damper Time Out
2, 3, 4
The timeout time used for an Interlocked Time Start, after which the start sequence
must be restarted if no acknowledgement contact is received.
RW
P18.12
485
Damper Delay
2, 3, 4
The delay time following a Delay Start, after which the frequency converter will be
started.
RW
P19.1
491
Interval 1 On Time
On time for Interval function. It uses 24-hour format.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.2
493
Interval 1 Off Time
Off time for Interval function. It uses 24-hour format.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.3
517
Interval 1 From Day
On day of week for Interval function.
2, 3, 4
RW
2, 3, 4
RW
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.4
P19.5
518
519
0
Sunday
1
Monday
2
Tuesday
3
Wednesday
4
Thursday
5
Friday
6
Saturday
Interval 1 To Day
On day of week for Interval function.
0
Sunday
1
Monday
2
Tuesday
3
Wednesday
4
Thursday
5
Friday
6
Saturday
Interval 1 Channel
Select affected time channel.
0
Not used
1
Time channel 1
2
Time channel 2
3
Time channel 3
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
181
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P19.6
495
Interval 2 On Time
See P19.1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.7
497
Interval 2 Off Time
See P19.2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.8
520
Interval 2 From Day
See P19.3.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.9
521
Interval 2 To Day
See P19.4.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.10
522
Interval 2 Channel
See P19.5.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.11
499
Interval 3 On Time
See P19.1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.12
501
Interval 3 Off Time
See P19.2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.13
523
Interval 3 From Day
See P19.3.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.14
524
Interval 3 To Day
See P19.4.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.15
525
Interval 3 Channel
See P19.5.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.16
503
Interval 4 On Time
See P19.1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.17
505
Interval 4 Off Time
See P19.2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.18
526
Interval 4 From Day
See P19.3.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.19
527
Interval 4 To Day
See P19.4.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.20
528
Interval 4 Channel
See P19.5.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.21
507
Interval 5 On Time
See P19.1.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.22
509
Interval 5 Off Time
See P19.2.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.23
529
Interval 5 From Day
See P19.3.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.24
530
Interval 5 To Day
See P19.4.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.25
531
Interval 5 Channel
See P19.5.
2, 3, 4
RW
182
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P19.26
511
Timer 1 Duration
The timer will run when activated by DI).
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.27
532
Timer 1 Channel
Select affected time channel.
2, 3, 4
RW
0
Not used
1
Time channel 1
2
Time channel 2
3
Time channel 3
P19.28
513
Timer 2 Duration
See P19.26.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.29
533
Timer 2 Channel
SeeP19.27.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.30
515
Timer 3 Duration
See P19.26.
2, 3, 4
RW
P19.31
534
Timer 3 Channel
See P19.27.
2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.1
1556
FB Data Output 1 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.2
1557
FB Data Output 2 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.3
1558
FB Data Output 3 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.4
1559
FB Data Output 4 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.5
1560
FB Data Output 5 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.6
1561
FB Data Output 6 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.7
1562
FB Data Output 7 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.1.8
1563
FB Data Output 8 Sel
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.1
586
RS-485 Comm Set
This parameter defines the communication protocol for RS-485.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
0
Modbus RTU
1
BACnet MS/TP
P20.2.2
587
Slave Address
This parameter defines the slave address for RS-485 communication.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.3
584
Baud Rate
This parameter defines communication speed for RS-485 communication.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.4
585
Parity Type
This parameter defines parity type for RS-485 communication.
1,2, 3, 4
RW
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
183
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P20.2.5
588
Protocol Status
This parameter shows the protocol status for RS-485 communication.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
0
Initial
1
Stopped
2
Operational
3
Faulted
P20.2.6
589
Slave Busy
Shows the status of the Slave device on the network.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.2.7
590
Parity Error
Counts the amount of Parity Errors seen on the RS-485 network.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.2.8
591
Slave Fault
Error response given when slave receives message without communication error,
but can't handle it.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.2.9
592
Last Fault Response
Stores the last active fault for viewing over communications.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.2.10
593
Comm Timeout Modbus RTU
1, 2, 3, 4
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over Modbus RTU if a
message isn't received.
RW
P20.2.11
594
BACnet Baud Rate
Communication speed of BACnet.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.12
595
MAC Address
Selects the BACnet Address that the drive will be located at on Instance node.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.13
596
Instance Number
Selects the BACnet Instance value.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.14
598
Comm Timeout BACnet
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over BACnet.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.15
599
BACnet Protocol Status
Shows the status of the BACnet protocol.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.2.16
600
BACnet Fault Code
BACnet protocol faults.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.3.1
1500
0
None
1
Sole Master
IP Address Mode
This parameter defined the IP address configuration mode for EIP/Modbus TCP.
0
DHCP with AutoIP
1
Static IP
P20.3.2
1507
Active IP Address
The current used IP address.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.3
1509
Active Subnet Mask
The current used subnet mask.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.4
1511
Active Default Gateway
The current used default gateway.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.5
1513
MAC Address
48 bit hardware address.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.6
1501
Static IP Address
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the IP address,
when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
184
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P20.3.7
1503
Static Subnet Mask
1, 2, 3, 4
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the subnet mask,
when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
RW
P20.3.8
1505
Static Default Gateway
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the default
gateway, when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.3.9
608
EtherNet/IP Protocol Status
Indicates if Ethernet Protocol is active or not.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
0
Stopped
1
Operational
2
Faulted
Application RO/RW
P20.3.10
609
Connection Limit
Maximum number of connections allowed to the frequency converter.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.3.11
610
Modbus TCP Unit ID
Unit identifier unit value for Modbus TCP.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.3.12
611
Comm Timeout
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over Ethernet.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P20.3.13
612
Protocol Status
0 Stopped
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
1
Operational
2
Faulted
P20.3.14
613
Slave Busy
Value indicates frequency converter is communicating.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.15
614
Parity Error
This parameter checks the input characters’ parity error.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.16
615
Slave Failure
Indicates the frequency converter is unable to process message.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P20.3.17
616
Last Fault Resp
Shows the last active fault that occurred.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.1.1
340
Language
This parameter offers the ability to control the frequency converter through the
keypad in the language of your choice. Currently available languages are: English,
Chinese, German, Spanish, French and Portuguese.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.1.2
142
Application
1, 2, 3, 4
This parameter sets the active application if multiple applications have been loaded.
RW
P21.1.3
619
Parameter Sets
This parameter allows you to reload the factory default parameter values, and to
store and load two customized parameter sets.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.1.4
620
0
No
1
Load Factory Default parameters
2
Store parameter set #1
3
Load parameter set #1
4
Store parameter set #2
5
Load parameter set #2
Up to Keypad
This function uploads all existing parameter groups to the keypad.
0
No
1
Yes (All parameters)
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
185
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
P21.1.5
621
Down From Keypad
1, 2, 3, 4
This function downloads one or all parameter groups from the keypad to the drive.
P21.1.6
623
0
No
1
Yes (All parameters)
Application RO/RW
Param Comparison
With the Parameter Comparison function, you can compare the actual parameter
values to the values of your customized parameter sets and those loaded to the
control keypad.
RW
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
Password
1, 2, 3, 4
The application selection can be protected against unauthorized changes with the
Password function. When the password function is enabled, the user will be
prompted to enter a password before application changes, parameter value changes,
or password changes.
RW
The actual parameter values are first compared to those of the customized
parameter Set1. If no differences are detected, a “0” is displayed on the lowermost
line of the keypad.
If any of the parameter values differ from those of the Set1 parameters, the number
of the deviations is displayed together.
By pressing the right arrow button once again you will see both the actual value and
the value it was compared to. In this display, the value on the Description line (in the
middle) is the default value, and the one on the value line (lowermost line) is the
edited value. You can also edit the actual value by pushing the Right Arrow button.
Actual values can also be compared to Set2, Factory Settings and Keypad Set
values.
P21.1.7
624
By default, the password function is not in use. If you want to activate the password,
change the value of this parameter to any number between 1 and 9999.
To deactivate the password, reset the parameter value to 0.
P21.1.8
625
Parameter Lock
1, 2, 3, 4
This function allows the user to prohibit changes to the parameters. If the parameter
lock is activated the text *locked* will appear on the display if you try to edit a
parameter value.
RW
Note: This function does not prevent unauthorized editing of parameter values.
P21.1.9
627
Multimonitor Set
The keypad display where can display three actual monitored values at the same
time. This parameter determines if the operator is allowed to replace the values
monitored with other values.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.1.10
628
Default Page
This parameter sets the view to which the display automatically moves as the
Timeout Time expires or when the keypad power is switched on.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
If the Default Page value is 0, the function is not activated, i.e., the last displayed
page remains on the keypad display.
P21.1.11
629
Timeout Time
1, 2, 3, 4
The Timeout Time setting defines the time after which the keypad display returns to
the Default Page.
[?]
Note: If the Default Page value is 0 the Timeout Time setting has no effect.
P21.1.12
630
Contrast Adjust
If the display is not clear, you can adjust the keypad contrast with this parameter.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.1.13
631
Backlight Time
This parameter determines how long the backlight stays on before going out.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
186
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P21.1.14
632
Fan Control
1, 2, 3, 4
This function allows you to control the PowerXL DG1’s cooling fan. You can set the
fan to run:
1
Continuous fan runs continuously
2
Temperature—based on the temperature of the unit. The fan is switched on
automatically when the heat sink temperature reaches 60°C. The fan receives a
stop command when the heat sink temperature falls to 55°C. The fan runs for
about a minute after receiving the stop command or switching on the power, as
well as after changing the value from “Continuous” to “Temperature”
3
First Start after power up, the fan is stopped until the run command is given and
then fan runs continuously. This is mainly made for common DC-bus systems to
prevent cooling fans to load charging resistors on power up moment
RW
4
Calc Temp starting of cooling fan is based on calculated IGBT temperature.
When IGBT temp = 40°C, fan starts and when temp falls down to 30°C, fan
stops
Note: The fan runs continuously, regardless of this setting, when the frequency
converter is in RUN state.
P21.1.15
633
HMI ACK Timeout
1, 2, 3, 4
This function allows the user to change the timeout of the HMI acknowledgement
time.
RW
Example:
l
Transfer delay between the frequency converter and the PC = 600 ms
l
l
The value of HMI Acknowledge Timeout is set to 1200 ms (2 x 600, sending delay
+ receiving delay)
l
The corresponding setting shall be entered in the [Misc]-part of the file
l
NCDrive.ini:
l
Retries = 5
l
AckTimeOut = 1200
l
TimeOut = 6000
It must also be considered that intervals shorter than the HMI Acknowledge Timeout
time cannot be used in frequency converter drive monitoring.
P21.1.16
634
HMI Retry Num
1, 2, 3, 4
With this parameter you can set the number of times the drive will try to receive
acknowledgement when it has not been received within the acknowledgement time
(HMI Acknowledge Timeout) or if the received acknowledgement is faulty.
RW
P21.2.1
640
Keypad Software Version
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.2.2
642
Motor Control Software Version
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.2.3
644
Application Software Version
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.3.1
646
Brake Chopper Stat
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.3.2
647
Brake Resistor
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.3.3
648
Serial Number
The Hardware information.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.4.1
566
Real Time Clock
This parameter shows the real time clock, user can also edit it to adjust time.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.4.2
582
Daylight Saving
Daylight saving rule.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
0
Off
1
EU
2
US
3
Russia
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
187
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
P21.4.3
601
Total MWh Count
Megawatt hours total operation time counter.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.4.4
603
Total Power Day Count
Number of days the GMAX has been supplied with power.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.4.5
606
Total Power Hr Count
Number of hours the GMAX has been supplied with power.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
P21.4.6
604
Trip MWh Count
Megawatts hours since last reset.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.4.7
635
Clear Trip MWh Count
Resets megawatts hours counter and clears Energy Meter in the Menu (P21.4.7).
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.4.8
636
Trip Power Day Count
Number of days since the last reset.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.4.9
637
Trip Power Hr Count
Number of hours the HVX9000 has been running a motor since the last reset.
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
P21.4.10
639
Clear Trip Power Count
Resets the day and hour motor or drive running counter and resets the Motor Run
Time in the Menu (P21.4.9 and P21.4.10).
1, 2, 3, 4
RW
M1
1
Output Frequency
Drive output frequency going to the motor. This value should match reference
frequency when in frequency control mode.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M2
24
Frequency Reference
1, 2, 3, 4
Drive frequency reference value. Motor output frequency should match this value in
frequency control mode.
RO
M3
2
Motor Speed
Motor speed is calculated based on the V/Hz curve that was set up when motor
parameters were entered.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M4
3
Motor Current
Measured output motor current.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M5
4
Motor Torque
Percent calculated motor torque based on the current draw of the motor and its
nameplate values.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M6
5
Motor Power
1, 2, 3, 4
Percent calculated motor power based on the current and voltage draw of the motor
and its nameplate values.
RO
M7
6
Motor Voltage
Measured output AC motor voltage.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M8
7
DC Link Voltage
Measured DC bus voltage.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M9
8
Unit Temperature
Measured drive heat sink temperature in °C.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M10
9
Motor Temperature
Calculated motor temperature value in percentage. Value is based on motor
nameplate data and the motor status information noted on power up.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M11
15
Torque Reference
Torque reference percentage used when in torque control mode.
4
RO
M12
10
Analog Input 1
Analog input 1 measured value. Can be a current or voltage input signal.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M13
11
Analog Input 2
Analog input 2 measured value. Can be a current or voltage input signal.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
188
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
M14
25
Analog Output 1
1, 2, 3, 4
Analog output 1 measured value supplied from the drive. Can be a current or voltage
output signal.
RO
M15
575
Analog Output 2
1, 2, 3, 4
Analog output 2 measured value supplied from the drive. Can be a current or voltage
output signal.
RO
M16
12
DI1, DI2, DI3
Digital input status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M17
13
DI4, DI5, DI6
Digital input status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M18
576
DI7, DI8
Digital input status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M19
14
DO1
Digital output status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M20
557
RO1, RO2, RO3
Relay output status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M21
558
TC1, TC2, TC3
Timer channel status.
2, 3, 4
RO
M22
559
Interval
Time interval 1 status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M23
560
Interval 2
Time interval 2 status.
2, 3, 4
RO
M24
561
Interval 3
Time interval 3 status.
2, 3, 4
RO
M25
562
Interval 4
Time interval 4 status.
2, 3, 4
RO
M26
563
Interval 5
Time interval 5 status.
2, 3, 4
RO
M27
569
Timer 1
Timer 1 value in seconds.
2, 3, 4
RO
M28
571
Timer 2
Timer 2 value in seconds.
2, 3, 4
RO
M29
573
Timer 3
Timer 3 value in seconds.
2, 3, 4
RO
M30
16
PID1 Set Point
PID1 reference value level.
2, 3, 4
RO
M31
18
PID1 Feedback
PID1 actual value feedback level.
2, 3, 4
RO
M32
20
PID1 Error Value
PID1 difference between set point and feedback value levels.
2, 3, 4
RO
M33
22
PID1 Output
PID1 output percentage to the motor.
2, 3, 4
RO
M34
23
PID1 Status
PID1 status indication. Indicates if drive is stopped, running in PID mode, or in
PID sleep mode.
2, 3, 4
RO
M35
32
PID2 Set Point
PID2 reference value level.
3, 4
RO
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
Application RO/RW
www.eaton.com
189
Appendix A—Description of Parameters
Code
Modbus ID
Parameter
Application RO/RW
M36
34
PID2 Feedback
PID2 actual value feedback level.
3, 4
RO
M37
36
PID2 Error Value
PID2 difference between set point and feedback value levels.
3, 4
RO
M38
38
PID2 Output
PID2 output percentage to the motor.
3, 4
RO
M39
39
PID2 Status
PID2 status indication. Indicates if drive is stopped, running in PID mode, or in
PID sleep mode.
3, 4
RO
M40
26
Running Motors
Number of auxiliary motors currently running.
2, 3, 4
RO
M41
27
PT100 Temperature
PT100 thermistor temperature value in °C.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M42
28
Last Active Fault
Last active fault value. See fault codes for the value shown here.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M43
583
RTC Battery Status
Real-time clock battery status.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M44
1686
Instance Motor Power
Measured Instantaneous motor power draw in kW.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M45
2119
Energy Savings
Displayed energy value based off of format chosen.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
M46
30
Multi-Monitoring
Multi-monitor screen. Allows for showing three monitoring values.
1, 2, 3, 4
RO
190
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
Under this menu, you can find Active faults, History faults and Fault codes.
Table 120. Active Faults
Menu
Function
Note
Active Faults
When a fault/faults appear(s), the display with the name and fault time of
the fault will be pop. Press DETAIL to see the fault data.
The Active Faults submenu shows the list of faults. Select the fault and
push DETAIL to see the fault data.
The fault remains active until it is cleared with the Reset button
(push for 2s) or with a reset signal from the I/O terminal or Fieldbus.
The memory of active faults can store the maximum of 10 faults in
the order of appearance.
Table 121. History Faults
Menu
Function
Note
History Faults
10 latest faults are stored in the Fault history, Select the fault and push
DETAIL to see the fault data.
The history fault will be stored until it is cleared with the OK button
(push for 5s).
The memory of active faults can store the maximum of 10 faults in
the order of appearance.
Fault Codes and Descriptions
Configurable 1 = The fault type of this fault is configurable, fault type can be configured as
0 = No Action; 1 = Warning; 2 = Fault; 3= Fault, Coast
Fault
Code
Fault Name
Fault Type
Default
Fault Type
Possible Cause
Remedy
1
OverCurrent
Fault
AC drive has detected too high a current
(>4*IH) in the motor cable:
• Sudden heavy load increase
• Short circuit in motor cables
• Unsuitable motor
•
•
•
•
•
2
OverVoltage
Fault
The DC-link voltage has exceeded the
limits defined:
• Too short a deceleration time
• Brake chopper is disabled
• High overvoltage spikes in supply
• Start/Stop sequence too fast
• Make deceleration time longer
• Use brake chopper or brake resistor
(available as options)
• Activate overvoltage controller
• Check input voltage
3
Earth Fault
Configurable 1
Current measurement has detected that
the sum of motor phase current is not zero:
• Insulation failure in cables or motor
Check motor cables and motor
4
Charging Switch
Fault
The charging switch is open, when the
START command has been given:
• Faulty operation
• Component failure
• Reset the fault and restart
• Should the fault re-occur, contact the
distributor near to you
5
Emergency Stop
Fault
• STO terminal open in control board
• Emergency signal from DI is activated
• Closed STO terminal
• Remove signal from DI
6
Saturation Trip
Fault
• Short circuit in motor cables
• IGBT module is damaged
Check cables and connections
Reset the fault and restart
• Should the fault re-occur, contact the
distributor near to you
7
System Fault
Fault
Unexpected fault occurred
Reset the fault and restart.
• Should the fault re-occur, contact the
distributor near to you
Fault
Check loading
Check motor
Check cables and connections
Make identification run
Check ramp times
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
191
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
Fault
Code
Fault Name
Fault Type
Default
Fault Type
Possible Cause
Remedy
8
UnderVoltage
Configurable 1
Fault
DC link voltage is under the voltage limits
defined:
• Most probable cause: Too low a supply
voltage
• AC drive internal fault
• Defect input fuse
• External charge switch not closed
Note: This fault is activated only if the drive is
in Run state.
In case of temporary supply voltage break
reset the fault and restart the AC drive
Check the supply voltage. If it is adequate,
an internal failure has occurred. Contact
the distributor near you
9
Input Phase Spv
Configurable 1
No Action
Input line phase is missing
Check supply voltage, fuses and cable
10
Output Phase Spv
Configurable
Fault
Current measurement has detected that there Check motor cable and motor
is no current in one motor phase
11
BrakeChopperSpv
Fault
12
Drive UnderTemp
Configurable 1
13
Drive OverTemp
Fault
14
Motor Stalled
Configurable 1
No Action
Motor is stalled
Check motor and load
15
Motor OverTemp
Configurable 1
No Action
Motor is too hot, based on either the drive’s
estimate or on temperature feedback
Decrease motor load. If no motor overload
exists, check the temperature model
parameters
16
Motor UnderLoad
Configurable 1
No Action
Condition defined by parameter
P1.9.15~P1.9.17 have been valid longer than
the time defined by P1.9.18
Check load
Warning
Reversed
1
• No brake resistor installed
• Brake resistor is broken
• Brake chopper failure
Warning
Check brake resistor and cabling. If these
are OK, the chopper is faulty. Contact the
distributor near you
Too low temperature measured in power
Unit’s heat sink or board. Heat sink
temperature is under –10°C
Too high temperature measured in power
Unit’s heat sink or board. Heat sink
temperature is over 90°C
• Check the correct amount and flow of
cooling air
• Check the heat sink for dust
• Check the ambient temperature
• Make sure that the switching frequency
is not too high in relation to ambient
temperature and motor load
17
IP Address Conflict
Configurable
18
Power board
EEPROM Fault
Fault
19
FRAM Fault
Fault
Fram data error
Check fram
20
Serial Flash Fault
Fault
Serial flash error
Check serial flash
Power board eeprom fault
Check eeprom
21
MCU Watchdog Fault Fault
Watchdog register overflows
Power cycle unit
22
Start-up Prevent
Fault
The time when Interlock signal activates is
over setting time
Stop drive
23
Thermistor Fault
Configurable 1
Option board or control board thermistor
resistor lager than 4.7K
Thermistor open or short, over
temperature
24
Fan Cooling
Fault
Fan is damaged or stalled
Check fan and fan connected wires
25
Compatibility Fault
Fault
The control board isn’t match with the power Contact the distributor near you
board
26
Device Change
Warning
Power board or option card change
27
Device Added
Warning
Power board or option board added
The option board was previously inserted
in the same slot. The board’s parameter
settings are saved
192
Fault
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
Device is ready for use
Old parameter settings will be used
www.eaton.com
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
Fault
Code
Fault Name
Fault Type
Default
Fault Type
Possible Cause
Remedy
28
Device Removed
Fault
Optional board removed from slot, or power
board removed from control board
Device no longer available
29
Device Unknown
Fault
Unknown device connected (power
board/option board
Device no longer available
30
IGBT OverTemp
Fault
IGBT temperature is too high
• Check loading
• Check motor size
• Decrease switching frequency
31
Encoder Fault
Fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
32
AIN<4 mA
(4 to 20 mA
Configurable 1
No Action
33
External Fault
Configurable 1
Fault
34
Keypad
Fault
Communication Fault
35
FieldBus
Configurable 1
communication Fault
Fault
Except communication board, also control
Check installation and Fieldbus master
board can communicate with external device
using RS-485 port, so the possible cause
includes the connection between external
device and control board
36
OPT Card Fault
Configurable 1
Fault
Defective option card or slot
Check option card and slot
37
BypassOverLoad
Fault
Over load when motor is in bypass mode
Check motor connection situation
38
Real time clock fault Configurable
Warning
• Communication between MCU and RTC
chip isn’t normal
• The power of RTC chip isn’t normal
• The real time isn’t normal
Check the RTC chip
39
PT100 Fault
Configurable 1
Fault
Temperature is over user set value
Pt100 short, open or over temperature
40
Motor ID fault
Fault
The Motor ID Run was not completed
successfully
Check motor size
Motor may be not compactable with VFD
41
Current Measure
Fault
Fault
Current measurement is out of range
Restart the drive again. Should the fault
re-occur, contact the distributor near to you
42
Possible power
Fault
wiring error detected
Reserved
43
Control Board
OverTemp
Fault
Control board is over +85 degrees or under
–30 degrees
Check NTC resistor
Check control board temperature
44
Internal-ctrl Supply
Fault
+24V port voltage is over 27V or under 17V
Check voltage range of +24V
45
Too Many Speed
Search Restarts
Fault
Speed searching failed
Check motor parameters’ setting
46
Current Unbalance
Fault
47
Replace Battery
Configurable 1
Warning
48
Replace Fan
Configurable
Warning
Fan life is less than 2 months
Check the fan
49
Safe Torque Off
Fault
STO Triggered
Reset STO Trigger
50
Over Current
Controller
Warning
The output current has reached the current
limit value
Check the load
Set the acceleration time longer
51
Over Voltage
Controller
Warning
The DC link voltage has reached its voltage
limit value
Check the input voltage
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
longer
Encoder 1 channel A is missing
Encoder 1 channel B is missing
Both encoder 1 channels are missing
Encoder reversed
Encoder board missing
Digital input
The connection between the control
keypad and frequency converter is broken
1
Check encoder connections
Check encoder and encoder cable
Check encoder board
Check encoder frequency in open loop
Check keypad connection and possible
keypad cable
Reserved
1
Battery voltage is too low
Check the battery
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
193
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
194
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
195
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes
196
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
MN040004EN—March 2014
www.eaton.com
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe
power is available when it’s needed most. With unparalleled
knowledge of electrical power management across industries,
experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to
solve our customers’ most critical challenges.
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the application.
But, decision makers demand more than just innovative products.
They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal
support that makes customer success a top priority. For more
information, visit www.eaton.com/electrical.
Eaton
1000 Eaton Boulevard
Cleveland, OH 44122
United States
Eaton.com
© 2014 Eaton
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. MN040004EN / Z14911
March 2014
Eaton is a registered trademark.
All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
Download PDF